Provided by: fvwm_2.7.0-2build2_amd64 bug

NAME

       Fvwm - F? Virtual Window Manager for X11

SYNOPSIS


       fvwm [-c config-command] [-d displayname] [-f config-file] [-r] [-s [screen_num]] [-V] [-C visual-class |
            -I visual-id] [-l colors [-L] [-A] [-S] [-P]] [-D] [-h] [-i client-id] [-F state-file]
            [--debug-stack-ring] [-blackout]

DESCRIPTION

       Fvwm is a window manager for X11.  It is designed to minimize memory consumption, provide a 3D look to
       window frames, and a virtual desktop.

       Note that there are several window managers around that have "fvwm" in their name.  In the past, version
       2.x of fvwm was commonly called fvwm2 to distinguish it from the former version 1.x (fvwm or even fvwm1).
       Since version 1.x has been replaced by version 2.x a long time ago we simply call version 2.x and all
       versions to come, fvwm, throughout this document, and the executable program is named fvwm.  There is an
       fvwm offspring called fvwm95, it is mostly a patched version of fvwm-2.0.43.  The main goal of fvwm95 was
       to supply a Windows 95 like look and feel.  Since then, fvwm has been greatly enhanced and practically
       all fvwm95 features can be achieved by fvwm.

       Fvwm provides both a large virtual desktop and multiple disjoint desktops which can be used separately or
       together.  The virtual desktop allows you to pretend that your video screen is really quite large, and
       you can scroll around within the desktop.  The multiple disjoint desktops allow you to pretend that you
       really have several screens to work at, but each screen is completely unrelated to the others.

       Fvwm provides keyboard accelerators that allow you to perform most window manager functions, including
       moving and resizing windows and operating the menus, using keyboard shortcuts.

       Fvwm has also overcome the distinction between configuration commands and action commands that most
       window managers make.  Configuration commands typically set fonts, colors, menu contents, and key and
       mouse function bindings, while action commands do things like raise and lower windows.  Fvwm makes no
       such distinction and allows anything to be changed at any time.

       Other noteworthy differences between fvwm and other X11 window managers are the introduction of the
       SloppyFocus and NeverFocus focus methods.  Focus policy can be separately specified for different window
       groups.  Windows using SloppyFocus acquire focus when the pointer moves into them and retain focus until
       some other window acquires it.  Such windows do not lose focus when the pointer moves into the root
       window.  The NeverFocus policy is provided for use with windows into which one never types (e.g. xclock,
       oclock, xbiff, xeyes, tuxeyes) - for example, if a SloppyFocus terminal window has focus, moving the
       pointer over a NeverFocus decoration window does not deprive the terminal of focus.

OPTIONS

       These are the command line options that are recognized by fvwm:

       -i | --clientid id
           This option is used when fvwm is started by a session manager.  Should not be used by a user.

       -c | --cmd config-command
           Causes fvwm to use config-command instead of 'Read config' (or 'Read .fvwm2rc') as its initialization
           command.  (Note that up to 10 -f and -c parameters can be given, and they are executed in the order
           specified.)

           Any module started by command line arguments is assumed to be a module that sends back config
           commands.  All command line modules have to quit before fvwm proceeds on to the StartFunction and
           setting border decorations and styles.  There is a potential deadlock if you start a module other
           than FvwmCpp/FvwmM4/FvwmPerl but there is a timeout so fvwm eventually gets going.

           As an example, starting the pager this way hangs fvwm until the timeout, but the following should
           work well:

               fvwm -c "AddToFunc StartFunction I Module FvwmPager"

       -d | --display displayname
           Manage the display called displayname instead of the name obtained from the environment variable
           $DISPLAY.

       -D | --debug
           Puts X transactions in synchronous mode, which dramatically slows things down, but guarantees that
           fvwm's internal error messages are correct.  Also causes fvwm to output debug messages while running.

       -f config-file
           Causes fvwm to read config-file instead of ~/.fvwm/config as its initialization file.  This is
           equivalent to -c 'Read config-file'.

       -h | --help
           A short usage description is printed.

       -r | --replace
           Try to take over from a previously running wm.  This does not work unless the other wm is ICCCM2 2.0
           compliant.

       -F | --restore state-file
           This option is used when fvwm is started by a session manager.  Should not be used by a user.

       -s | --single-screen [screen_num]
           On a multi-screen display, run fvwm only on the screen named in the $DISPLAY environment variable or
           provided through the -d option.  The optional argument screen_num should be positive or null and
           override the screen number.  Normally, fvwm attempts to start up on all screens of a multi-screen
           display.

       -V | --version
           Prints the version of fvwm to stderr.  Also prints an information about the compiled in support for
           readline, rplay, stroke, xpm, png, svg, GNOME hints, EWMH hints, session management, bidirectional
           text, multibyte characters, xinerama and Xft aa font rendering.

       -C | --visual visual-class
           Causes fvwm to use visual-class for the window borders and menus.  visual-class can be "StaticGray",
           "GrayScale", "StaticColor", "PseudoColor", "TrueColor" or "DirectColor".

       -I | --visualid id
           Causes fvwm to use id as the visual id for the window borders and menus.  id can be specified as N
           for decimal or 0xN for hexadecimal.  See man page of xdpyinfo for a list of supported visuals.

       -l | --color-limit limit
           Specifies a limit on the colors used in image, gradient and possibly simple colors used by fvwm.  In
           fact, fvwm (and all the modules) uses a palette with at most limit colors.  This option is only
           useful with screens that display 256 colors (or less) with a dynamic visual (PseudoColor, GrayScale
           or DirectColor).  The default depends on your X server and how you run fvwm.  In most case this
           default is reasonable.  The -l option should be used only if you encounter problems with colors.  By
           default, fvwm tries to detect large pre-allocated palettes.  If such a palette is detected fvwm uses
           it and a priori the -l must not be used.  Moreover, in this case the -A and -S options are forced.
           Note that XFree-4.2 pre-allocates 244 colors (if you use a driver with Render support) leaving only a
           few free colors.  This may lead to some color problems (and nothing can be done).  XFree-4.3 or
           better pre-allocate only 85 colors.  If no pre-allocated palette is auto detected the defaults are as
           follow:

           Display depth 8 (256 colors)

                   PseudoColor: 68 (4x4x4 color cube + 4 grey)
                   GrayScale: 64 regular grey
                   DirectColor: 32 (3x3x3 color cube + 5 grey)

           Display depth 4 (16 colors)

                   PseudoColor: 10 (2x2x2 color cube + 2 grey)
                   GrayScale: 8 regular grey
                   DirectColor: 10 (2x2x2 color cube + 2 grey)

           These  defaults  may change before version 2.6.  Note that if you use a private color map (i.e., fvwm
           is started with the -C or the -I options), then other defaults are used.

           Now what to do if you encounter problems with colors? The first thing to do is to check if you really
           cannot run your X server with depth 15, 16 or better.  Check your X server documentation.  Note  that
           some  hardware  can support two different depths on the same screen (typically depth 8 and depth 24).
           If depth 8 is the default, you can force fvwm to use the best depth  by  using  the  -C  option  with
           TrueColor  as argument.  So now we assume that you are forced to run in depth 8 with a dynamic visual
           because your hardware/driver cannot do better or because you need to use an application  which  needs
           to  run  under this mode (e.g., because this application needs read-write colors).  What it should be
           understand is that you have only 256 colors and that all the applications which use the default color
           map must share these colors.  The main problem is that there are applications which use a lot or even
           all the colors.  If you use such application you may have no more free colors and  some  applications
           (which used only a few colors) may fail to start or are unusable.  There are three things that can be
           done (and fvwm does not really play a particular role, all applications are concerned).  The first is
           to  run the applications which waste your (default) color map with a private color map.  For example,
           run netscape with the -install option, run KDE or QT applications with the --cmap option, use the  -C
           option  for  fvwm.   The  disadvantage  of  this  method  is  that it is visually disturbing (see the
           ColormapFocus command for a better control of the color maps switching).  The  second  method  is  to
           limit  the  number  of  colors  that  the applications use.  Again, some applications have options to
           specify a given color limit.  With fvwm you may try various values, 61 (a special "visual"  palette),
           56 (a 4x4x3 color cube plus 6 grey), 29 (a 3x3x3 color cube plus 2 grey), 10 or 9.  Also, you may use
           the  -L  option.   However,  limiting  the  number  of  colors  is  not the definitive solution.  The
           definitive solution is to try cause applications which use a lot of colors use the same colors.  This
           is a difficult task as there are no formal standards for this goal.  However, some toolkits as QT and
           GTK use color cubes as palettes.  So, the idea is to configure your applications/toolkits to all  use
           the  same  color  cube.   Moreover,  you  can  use  the colors in this color cube in your X resources
           configuration files and/or as arguments to colors options.  Fvwm can use any color cube of  the  form
           RxGxB with 2 <= R <= 6, R = G, R-1 =< B <= R and B >= 2.  To get an RxGxB color cube give an argument
           to  -l  an integer c >= R*G*B and < (R+1)*(G+1)*B if B=R and < R*G*(B+1) if B < R (and different from
           61).  If c > R*G*B, then some grey may be added to the color cube.  You can use the PrintInfo  Colors
           [1]  command  to get information on your fvwm colors setting.  In particular, this command prints the
           palette used by fvwm in rgb format (the last integer gives the number of times fvwm has allocated the
           colors).

       -L | --strict-color-limit
           If the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic visual, causes fvwm to use its  palette
           for all the colors.  By default, the palette is used only for images and gradients.

       -P | --visual-palette
           If  the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic visual, this option causes fvwm to use
           a palette designed for limiting the "visual" color  distance  between  the  points  of  the  palette.
           Moreover,  for  better  color sharing, if possible colors with a name in the X rgb data base are used
           for defining the colors (with the hope that applications and images prefer to use named colors).   If
           the -l option is not used this palette has 61 colors.  This palette is also automatically selected if
           61 or 9 is used as argument to the -l option.

       -A | --allocate-palette
           If  the  screen  displays  256  colors  (or less) and has a dynamic visual this option causes fvwm to
           allocate all the colors of its palette at start up for reserving these colors for future  use.   This
           option  forces  the  -static-palette  option.   By  default, fvwm allocates (reserves) a color in its
           palette only if it needs this color.

       -S | --static-palette
           If the screen displays 256 colors (or less) and has a dynamic visual this option causes fvwm to never
           free the colors in its palette.  By default, when fvwm does not need a color any more it  frees  this
           color so that a new color can be used.  This option may speed up image loading and save a few bits of
           memory.

       -blackout
           This  option  is provided for backward compatibility only.  Blacking out the screen during startup is
           not necessary (and doesn't work) anymore.  This option will be removed in the future.

       --debug-stack-ring
           Enables stack ring debugging.  This option is only intended for internal debugging and should only be
           used by developers.

ANATOMY OF A WINDOW

       Fvwm puts a decorative border around most windows.  This border consists of a bar  on  each  side  and  a
       small L-shaped section on each corner.  There is an additional top bar called the title-bar which is used
       to  display  the  name of the window.  In addition, there are up to 10 title-bar buttons.  The top, side,
       and bottom bars are collectively known as the side-bars.  The corner pieces are called the frame.

       With the built-in minimal configuration, dragging mouse button 1 in  the  frame  or  side-bars  begins  a
       resize  operation  on  the  window.   Dragging  mouse  button  2  in the frame or side-bars begins a move
       operation.  There are raise/lower operations bound to a single clicking on borders.   Similarly  for  the
       window title.

       Up  to  ten  title-bar  buttons  may  exist.   Their  use  is  completely  user  definable.   One popular
       configuration uses one button on the left that is used to bring up a  list  of  window  options  and  two
       buttons on the right used to iconify and maximize the window.  Another popular configuration adds a close
       button to the right.  The number of title-bar buttons used depends on which ones have mouse actions bound
       to them.  See the Mouse command.

THE VIRTUAL DESKTOP

       Fvwm  provides multiple virtual desktops for users who wish to use them.  The screen is a viewport onto a
       desktop which may be larger than the screen.  Several distinct desktops can  be  accessed  (concept:  one
       desktop  for  each  project,  or  one desktop for each application, when view applications are distinct).
       Since each desktop can be larger than the physical screen, divided into m by n pages which are  each  the
       size  of the physical screen, windows which are larger than the screen or large groups of related windows
       can easily be viewed.

       The (m by n) size (i.e. number of pages) of the virtual desktops can be changed any time,  by  using  the
       DesktopSize  command.   All  virtual  desktops must be (are) the same size.  The total number of distinct
       desktops does not need to be specified, but is limited to approximately 4 billion total.  All windows  on
       a  range  of  desktops can be viewed in the FvwmPager, a miniature view of the desktops.  The pager is an
       accessory program, called a module, which is not essential for the window manager  to  operate.   Windows
       may also be listed using the WindowList command or the FvwmIconMan module.

       Fvwm  keeps  the  windows  on  the  desktop  in a layered stacking order; a window in a lower layer never
       obscures a window in a higher layer.  The layer of a window can be changed by using  the  Layer  command.
       The  concept of layers is a generalization of the StaysOnTop flag of older fvwm versions.  The StaysOnTop
       and StaysPut Style options are now implemented  by  putting  the  windows  in  suitable  layers  and  the
       previously missing StaysOnBottom Style option has been added.

       Sticky windows are windows which transcend the virtual desktop by "Sticking to the screen's glass".  They
       always stay put on the screen.  This is convenient for things like clocks and xbiffs, so you only need to
       run  one  such  gadget  and  it  always stays with you.  Icons can also be made to stick to the glass, if
       desired.

       Window geometries are specified relative to the current viewport.  That is:

           xterm -geometry +0+0

       creates a window in the upper left hand corner of the visible portion of the screen.  It  is  permissible
       to  specify  geometries  which place windows on the virtual desktop, but off the screen.  For example, if
       the visible screen is 1000 by 1000 pixels, and the desktop size is 3x3, and the current  viewport  is  at
       the upper left hand corner of the desktop, invoking:

           xterm -geometry +1000+1000

       places  a  window  just  off of the lower right hand corner of the screen.  It can be found by moving the
       mouse to the lower right hand corner of the screen and waiting for it to scroll into  view.   A  geometry
       specified as something like:

           xterm -geometry -5-5

       places  the  window's lower right hand corner 5 pixels from the lower right corner of the visible portion
       of the screen.  Not all applications support window geometries with negative offsets.  Some  applications
       place  the  window's upper right hand corner 5 pixels above and to the left of the upper left hand corner
       of the screen; others may do just plain bizarre things.

       There are several ways to cause a window to map onto a desktop or page other than  the  currently  active
       one.   The geometry technique mentioned above (specifying x,y coordinates larger than the physical screen
       size), however, suffers from the limitation of being interpreted relative to the  current  viewport:  the
       window  may not consistently appear on a specific page, unless you always invoke the application from the
       same page.

       A better way to place windows on a different page, screen or desk from the currently mapped  viewport  is
       to  use  the StartsOnPage or StartsOnScreen style specification (the successors to the older StartsOnDesk
       style) in your config file.  The placement is consistent: it does not depend on your current location  on
       the virtual desktop.

       Some  applications  that  understand  standard  Xt command line arguments and X resources, like xterm and
       xfontsel, allow the user to specify the start-up desk or page on the command line:

           xterm -xrm "*Desk:1"

       starts an xterm on desk number 1;

           xterm -xrm "*Page:3 2 1"

       starts an xterm two pages to the right and one down from the upper left hand page of desk number 3.   Not
       all  applications  understand the use of these options, however.  You could achieve the same results with
       the following lines in your .Xdefaults file:

           XTerm*Desk: 1

       or

           XTerm*Page: 3 2 1

USE ON MULTI-SCREEN DISPLAYS

       If the -s command line argument is not given, fvwm  automatically  starts  up  on  every  screen  on  the
       specified  display.  After fvwm starts each screen is treated independently.  Restarts of fvwm need to be
       performed separately on each screen.  The use of

           EdgeScroll 0 0

       is strongly recommended for multi-screen displays.  You may need to quit on each screen to quit from  the
       X session completely.  This is not to be confused with Xinerama support.

XINERAMA SUPPORT

       Fvwm  supports the Xinerama extension of newer X servers which is similar to multi head support (multiple
       screens) but allows one to move windows between screens.  If Xinerama  support  has  been  compiled  into
       fvwm,  it is used whenever fvwm runs on an X server that supports and uses multiple screens via Xinerama.
       Without this option, the whole desktop is treated as one big screen.  For example,  menus  might  pop  up
       right  between two screens.  The EdgeResistance option of the Style command command allows for specifying
       an explicit resistance value for moving windows over  the  screen  edge  between  two  Xinerama  screens.
       Xinerama  support  can be enabled or disabled on the fly or from the configuration file with the Xinerama
       command.  Many modules and commands work nicely with Xinerama displays.

       Whenever a geometry in the usual  X  format  can  be  supplied,  fvwm's  Xinerama  extension  allows  for
       specifying  a  screen in addition to the geometry (or even the screen alone).  To do this, a '@' is added
       to the end of the geometry string followed by either the screen number or a letter.  A number is taken as
       the number of the Xinerama screen to be used (as configured in the X server).  The letter can be  one  of
       'g'  for the global screen (the rectangle that encloses all Xinerama screens), 'p' for the primary screen
       (see below), 'c' for the current screen (the one that currently contains the pointer).  If the  X  server
       does not support Xinerama or only one screen is used, the screen bit is ignored.

           Style * IconBox 64x300-0-0@p

       Xinerama  support can be configured to use a primary screen.  Fvwm can be configured to place new windows
       and icons on this screen.  The primary screen is screen  0  by  default  but  can  be  changed  with  the
       XineramaPrimaryScreen command.

       Xinerama  support was designed to work out of the box with the same configuration file that would work on
       a single screen.  It may not perform very well if the involved screens use different screen  resolutions.
       In  this  situation,  windows  may  get stuck in the portion of the whole desktop that belongs to neither
       screen.  When this happens, the windows or icons can be retrieved with the command

           All MoveToScreen

       that can be entered in an FvwmConsole window or with FvwmCommand.

       For multi-screen implementations other than Xinerama, such as Single Logical Screen, it  is  possible  to
       simulate  a Xinerama configuration if the total screen seen by fvwm is made up of equal sized monitors in
       a rectangular grid.  The  commands  XineramaSls,  XineramaSlsSize  and  XineramaSlsScreens  are  used  to
       configure this feature.

INITIALIZATION

       During  initialization,  fvwm  searches for a configuration file which describes key and button bindings,
       and many other things.  The  format  of  these  files  is  described  later.   Fvwm  first  searches  for
       configuration files using the command

           Read config

       This looks for file config in $FVWM_USERDIR and $FVWM_DATADIR directories, as described in Read.  If this
       fails more files are queried for backward compatibility.  Here is the complete list of all file locations
       queried in the default installation (only the first found file is used):

           $HOME/.fvwm/config
           /usr/local/share/fvwm/config

           $HOME/.fvwm/.fvwm2rc
           $HOME/.fvwm2rc
           /usr/local/share/fvwm/.fvwm2rc
           /usr/local/share/fvwm/system.fvwm2rc
           /etc/system.fvwm2rc

       Please note, the last 5 locations are not guaranteed to be supported in the future.

       If  a configuration file is not found, the left mouse button, or Help or F1 keys on the root window bring
       up menus and forms that can create a starting configuration file.

       Fvwm sets two environment variables which are inherited  by  its  children.   These  are  $DISPLAY  which
       describes the display on which fvwm is running.  $DISPLAY may be unix:0.0 or :0.0, which doesn't work too
       well when passed through ssh to another machine, so $HOSTDISPLAY is set to a network-ready description of
       the  display.   $HOSTDISPLAY  always  uses the TCP/IP transport protocol (even for a local connection) so
       $DISPLAY should be used for local connections, as it may use Unix-domain sockets, which are faster.

       If you want to start some applications or modules with fvwm, you can simply put

           Exec app

       or

           Module FvwmXxx

       into your config, but it is not recommended; do this only if you know what you are doing.  It is  usually
       important to start applications or modules after the entire config is read, because it contains styles or
       module configurations which can affect window appearance and functionality.

       The  standard way to start applications or modules on fvwm's start up is to add them to an initialization
       function (usually StartFunction or InitFunction).  This way they are only started after fvwm finishes  to
       read and execute config file.

       Fvwm  has  three  special  functions for initialization: StartFunction, which is executed on startups and
       restarts; InitFunction and  RestartFunction,  which  are  executed  during  initialization  and  restarts
       (respectively) just after StartFunction.  These functions may be customized in a user's config file using
       the  AddToFunc  command  (described  later)  to  start up modules, xterms, or whatever you'd like to have
       started by fvwm.

       Fvwm has also a special exit function: ExitFunction, executed when exiting or restarting before  actually
       quitting.  It could be used to explicitly kill modules, etc.

       If  fvwm  is  run  under  a session manager, functions SessionInitFunction and SessionRestartFunction are
       executed instead of InitFunction and RestartFunction.  This helps to define the user's config file to  be
       good for both running under a session manager and without it.  Generally it is a bad idea to start xterms
       or  other applications in "Session*" functions.  Also someone can decide to start different modules while
       running under a session manager or not.  For the similar purposes SessionExitFunction is used instead  of
       ExitFunction.

           DestroyFunc StartFunction
           AddToFunc StartFunction
            + I Module FvwmPager * *
            + I Module FvwmButtons

           DestroyFunc InitFunction
           AddToFunc InitFunction
            + I Module FvwmBanner
            + I Module FvwmIconMan
            + I Exec xsetroot -solid cyan
            + I Exec xterm
            + I Exec netscape

           DestroyFunc RestartFunction
           AddToFunc RestartFunction
            + I Module FvwmIconMan

           DestroyFunc SessionInitFunction
           AddToFunc SessionInitFunction
            + I Module FvwmBanner

           DestroyFunc SessionRestartFunction
           AddToFunc SessionRestartFunction
            + I Nop

       You  do  not  need  to  define  all  special  functions  if some are empty.  Also note, all these special
       functions may be emulated now using StartFunction and ExitFunction, like this:

           DestroyFunc StartFunction
           AddToFunc StartFunction
           + I Test (Init) Module FvwmBanner
           + I Module FvwmPager * *
           + I Test (Restart) Beep

           DestroyFunc ExitFunction
           AddToFunc ExitFunction
           + I Test (Quit) Echo Bye-bye
           + I KillModule MyBuggyModule
           + I Test (ToRestart) Beep

COMPILATION OPTIONS

       Fvwm has a number of compile-time options.  If you have trouble using a certain command or feature, check
       to see if support for it was included at compile time.  Optional features are described in  the  config.h
       file that is generated during compilation.

ICONS AND IMAGES

       Fvwm  can load .xbm, .xpm, .png and .svg images.  XBM images are monochrome.  Fvwm can always display XBM
       files.  XPM and PNG formats are color images.  SVG is  a  vector  graphics  image  format.   Compile-time
       options  determine  whether fvwm can display XPM, PNG or SVG icons and images.  See the INSTALL.fvwm file
       for more information.

       The related SHAPE compile-time option can make fvwm display spiffy shaped icons.

   SVG rendering options
       SVG images are generated from (XML) text files.  A really simple SVG file might look something like this:

           <svg width="120" height="80">
                <rect fill="red"     width="40" height="40"  x="0"   y="0"  />
                <rect fill="lime"    width="40" height="40"  x="40"  y="0"  />
                <rect fill="blue"    width="40" height="40"  x="80"  y="0"  />
                <rect fill="cyan"    width="40" height="40"  x="0"   y="40" />
                <rect fill="magenta" width="40" height="40"  x="40"  y="40" />
                <rect fill="yellow"  width="40" height="40"  x="80"  y="40" />
           </svg>

       By default, SVG images are rendered as the image creator intended them to.  But since  SVG  is  a  vector
       graphics  format,  the images can be rendered at any chosen size and rotation, e.g. making it possible to
       use the same icon file rendered at different sizes for the Icon and MiniIcon styles.

       The rendering options are specified as a string appended to the SVG filename as follows:

       image.svg:[!] [(1) size] [(2) position] [(3) rotation] [(4) scale] ...

       (1) [-]width{x}[-]height

       (2) {- | +}xpos{- | +}ypos

       (3) @[-]angle

       (4) {* | /}[-]factor[x | y]

       The option string always starts with a colon (':') to separate it from the  filename.   An  empty  option
       string  can  skip this colon, but it might still be a good idea to include it to prevent ambiguity if the
       filename contains any colon.

           filename_without_colon.svg
           filename:with:colon.svg:

       An exclamation point ('!') transposes the entire final image (including the rendering area), i.e. all the
       horizontal and all the vertical coordinates are swapped with each other.

           image.svg:!

       width and height specifies the dimensions of the rendering area in pixels, i.e.  the  dimensions  of  the
       resulting image.  The actual image is fitted to fill the entire rendering area.

           image.svg:60x60

       Use a width or height value of 0 to keep the aspect ratio.

           image.svg:0x60
           image.svg:60x0

       A '-' before width mirrors the rendering area horizontally.

           image.svg:-0x0

       A '-' before height mirrors the rendering area vertically.

           image.svg:0x-0

       xpos  and  ypos specifies a translation of the image in pixels.  A positive xpos value moves the image to
       the right.  A positive ypos value moves it down.  Moving it  partially  outside  of  the  rendering  area
       results in a cropped image.

           image.svg:-30-0
           image.svg:-0+10
           image.svg:-30+10

       angle  specifies  a  rotation  around the actual image center in degrees.  This might result in a cropped
       image.  A positive value rotates the image clockwise.  Floating point values are recognized.

           image.svg:@180
           image.svg:@-90
           image.svg:@30
           image.svg:@57.3

       factor specifes a scaling of the actual image (not the rendering area).   Scaling  it  up  results  in  a
       cropped  image.   Floating  point  values  are  recognized.   Division  by zero is ignored.  If factor is
       directly followed by a 'x' or a 'y', the scaling is horizontal or vertical respectively.   Otherwise  the
       scaling is uniform.

           image.svg:*2
           image.svg:/2
           image.svg:/3x
           image.svg:/2y

       Scaling down a translated or rotated image can prevent cropping.

           image.svg:@30*0.6

       Repeated  usage of translation, rotation, and scaling is allowed.  Translation and rotation are additive.
       Scaling is multiplicative.

           image.svg:*2/3
           image.svg:/3x/2y

       When combining affine transformations, the scaling is always done first, then the rotation,  and  finally
       the translation.

           image.svg:-30+10@30/3x/2y

       Use a negative scale factor to mirror the actual image.

           image.svg:-30+10@30/-3x/2y

       Mirroring of the rendering area is done after any scaling, rotation or translation of the image.

           image.svg:-0x0-30+10@30/3x/2y

       Transposing is done last of all, after everything else.

           image.svg:!-0x0-30+10@30/3x/2y

MODULES

       A  module  is  a separate program which runs as a separate Unix process but transmits commands to fvwm to
       execute.  Users can write their own modules to do any weird or bizarre manipulations without bloating  or
       affecting the integrity of fvwm itself.

       Modules  must  be  spawned by fvwm so that it can set up two pipes for fvwm and the module to communicate
       with.  The pipes are already open for the module when it starts and the file descriptors  for  the  pipes
       are provided as command line arguments.

       Modules  can  be  spawned by fvwm at any time during the X session by use of the Module command.  Modules
       can exist for the duration of the X session, or can perform a single task and exit.   If  the  module  is
       still  active  when fvwm is told to quit, then fvwm closes the communication pipes and waits to receive a
       SIGCHLD from the module, indicating that it has detected the pipe closure and  has  exited.   If  modules
       fail  to  detect  the  pipe  closure  fvwm  exits  after  approximately 30 seconds anyway.  The number of
       simultaneously executing modules is limited by the operating system's maximum  number  of  simultaneously
       open files, usually between 60 and 256.

       Modules  simply transmit commands to the fvwm command engine.  Commands are formatted just as in the case
       of a mouse binding in the config setup file.  Certain auxiliary information is also  transmitted,  as  in
       the sample module FvwmButtons.

       Please refer to the Module Commands section for details.

ICCCM COMPLIANCE

       Fvwm  attempts  to  be  ICCCM  2.0  compliant.   Check http://tronche.com/gui/x/icccm/ for more info.  In
       addition, ICCCM states that it should be possible for applications to receive any keystroke, which is not
       consistent with the keyboard shortcut  approach  used  in  fvwm  and  most  other  window  managers.   In
       particular  you  cannot  have the same keyboard shortcuts working with your fvwm and another fvwm running
       within Xnest (a nested X server running in a window).  The same problem exists with mouse bindings.

       The ICCCM states that windows possessing the property

           WM_HINTS(WM_HINTS):
               Client accepts input or input focus: False

       should not be given the keyboard input focus by the window manager.  These windows  can  take  the  input
       focus  by  themselves,  however.   A  number of applications set this property, and yet expect the window
       manager to give them the keyboard focus anyway, so fvwm provides a window style, Lenience,  which  allows
       fvwm  to overlook this ICCCM rule.  Even with this window style it is not guaranteed that the application
       accepts focus.

       The differences between ICCCM 1.1 and 2.0 include the ability to take  over  from  a  running  ICCCM  2.0
       compliant window manager; thus

           fvwm; vi ~/.fvwm/config; fvwm -replace

       resembles  the  Restart command.  It is not exactly the same, since killing the previously running wm may
       terminate your X session, if the wm was started as the last client in your .Xclients or .Xsession file.

       Further additions are support for client-side colormap installation (see the ICCCM for details)  and  the
       urgency  hint.   Clients can set this hint in the WM_HINTS property of their window and expect the window
       manager to attract the user's attention to the window.  Fvwm has  two  re-definable  functions  for  this
       purpose,  "UrgencyFunc"  and  "UrgencyDoneFunc",  which are executed when the flag is set/cleared.  Their
       default definitions are:

           AddToFunc UrgencyFunc
            + I Iconify off
            + I FlipFocus
            + I Raise
            + I WarpToWindow !raise 5p 5p
           AddToFunc UrgencyDoneFunc
            + I Nop

GNOME COMPLIANCE

       Fvwm attempts to be GNOME (version 1) compliant.  Check http://www.gnome.org for what that may mean.   To
       disable GNOME hints for some or all windows, the GNOMEIgnoreHints style can be used.

EXTENDED WINDOW MANAGER HINTS

       Fvwm  attempts  to  respect  the  extended  window  manager hints (ewmh or EWMH for short) specification:
       http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Standards_2fwm_2dspec and some extensions of  this  specification.   This
       allows  fvwm  to  work  with  KDE version >= 2, GNOME version 2 and other applications which respect this
       specification (any application based on GTK+ version 2).  Applications which respect  this  specification
       are called ewmh compliant applications.

       This support is configurable with styles and commands.  These styles and commands have EWMH as the prefix
       (so you can find them easily in this man page).

       There  is  a  new  Context  'D'  for the Key, PointerKey, Mouse and Stroke commands.  This context is for
       desktop applications (such as kdesktop and Nautilus desktop).

       When a compliant taskbar asks fvwm to activate a window (typically when  you  click  on  a  button  which
       represents a window in such a taskbar), then fvwm calls the complex function EWMHActivateWindowFunc which
       by default is Iconify Off, Focus and Raise.  You can redefine this function.  For example:

           DestroyFunc EWMHActivateWindowFunc
           AddToFunc EWMHActivateWindowFunc I Iconify Off
           + I Focus
           + I Raise
           + I WarpToWindow 50 50

       additionally warps the pointer to the center of the window.

       The  EWMH  specification introduces the notion of Working Area.  Without ewmh support the Working Area is
       the full visible screen (or all your screens if you have a  multi  head  setup  and  you  use  Xinerama).
       However, compliant applications (such as a panel) can ask to reserve space at the edge of the screen.  If
       this  is  the case, the Working Area is your full visible screen minus these reserved spaces.  If a panel
       can be hidden by clicking on a button the Working Area does not change (as you can unhide  the  panel  at
       any time), but the Dynamic Working Area is updated: the space reserved by the panel is removed (and added
       again  if  you  pop  up the panel).  The Dynamic Working Area may be used when fvwm places or maximizes a
       window.  To know if an application reserves space you can type "xprop | grep _NET_WM_STRUT" in a terminal
       and select the application.  If four numbers appear then these  numbers  define  the  reserved  space  as
       explained in the EwmhBaseStruts command.

MWM COMPATIBILITY

       Fvwm  provides  options  to  emulate Motif Window Manager (Mwm) as well as possible.  Please refer to the
       Emulate command as well as to the Mwm specific options of the Style and MenuStyle commands for details.

OPEN LOOK AND XVIEW COMPATIBILITY

       Fvwm supports all the Open Look decoration hints (except pushpins).  Should you use any such application,
       please add the following line to your config:

           Style * OLDecor

       Most (perhaps all) Open Look applications have a strange notion of keyboard focus handling.   Although  a
       lot  of work went into fvwm to work well with these, you may still encounter problems.  It is recommended
       to use the NeverFocus focus policy and the Lenience style for all such applications  (the  windows  still
       get the focus):

           Style <application name> NeverFocus, Lenience

       But in case you can not live with that focus policy, you can try using one of the other focus policies in
       combination with the Lenience style:

           Style <application name> MouseFocus, Lenience
           Style <application name> SloppyFocus, Lenience
           Style <application name> ClickToFocus, Lenience

M4 PREPROCESSING

       M4 pre-processing is handled by a module in fvwm.  To get more details, try man FvwmM4.  In short, if you
       want  fvwm  to parse your files with m4, then replace the command Read with FvwmM4 in your ~/.fvwm/config
       file (if it appears at all), and start fvwm with the command

           fvwm -cmd "FvwmM4 config"

CPP PREPROCESSING

       Cpp is the C-language pre-processor.  fvwm offers cpp processing which mirrors the m4 pre-processing.  To
       find out about it, re-read the M4 section, but replace "m4" with "cpp".

CONFIGURATION

   Configuration Files
       The configuration file is used to describe mouse and button bindings, colors, the virtual  display  size,
       and  related  items.  The initialization configuration file is typically called config (or .fvwm2rc).  By
       using the Read command, it is easy to read in new configuration files as you go.

       Lines beginning with '#' are ignored by fvwm.  Lines starting with '*' are  expected  to  contain  module
       configuration  commands  (rather  than  configuration  commands  for fvwm itself).  Like in shell scripts
       embedded newlines in a configuration file line can be quoted by preceding them  with  a  backslash.   All
       lines linked in this fashion are treated as a single line.  The newline itself is ignored.

       Fvwm  makes  no  distinction between configuration commands and action commands, so anything mentioned in
       the fvwm commands section can be placed on a line  by  itself  for  fvwm  to  execute  as  it  reads  the
       configuration  file, or it can be placed as an executable command in a menu or bound to a mouse button or
       a keyboard key.  It is left as an exercise  for  the  user  to  decide  which  function  make  sense  for
       initialization and which ones make sense for run-time.

   Supplied Configuration
       A  sample  configuration  file,  is supplied with the fvwm distribution.  It is well commented and can be
       used as a source of examples for fvwm configuration.  It may be copied from  /usr/local/share/fvwm/config
       file.

       Alternatively,  the  built-in menu (accessible when no configuration file is found) has options to create
       an initial config file for the user.

FONTS

   Font names and font loading
       The fonts used for the text of a window title, icon titles, menus and geometry window can be specified by
       using the Font and IconFont Style, the Font MenuStyle  and  the  DefaultFont  commands.   Also,  all  the
       Modules  which  use text have configuration command(s) to specify font(s).  All these styles and commands
       take a font name as an argument.  This section explains what is a font name for fvwm and which fonts fvwm
       loads.

       First, you can use what we can call a usual font name, for example,

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-100-75-75-m-60-ISO8859-1
           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*
           -*-fixed-medium-o-normal--14-*-ISO8859-15

       That is, you can use an X Logical Font Description (XLFD for short).  Then the "first" font which matches
       the description is loaded and used.  This "first" font depends of your font path and also of your locale.
       Fonts which match the locale charset are loaded in priority order.  For example with

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*

       if the locale charset is ISO8859-1, then fvwm tries to load a font which matches

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*-ISO8859-1

       with the locale charset ISO8859-15 fvwm tries to load

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--10-*-ISO8859-15.

       A font name can be given as an extended XLFD.  This is a comma  separated  list  of  (simple)  XLFD  font
       names, for example:

           -adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--14-*,-*-courier-medium-r-normal--14-*

       Each  simple  font name is tried until a matching font with the locale charset is found and if this fails
       each simple font name is tried without constraint on the charset.

       More details on the XLFD can be found in the X manual page, the X Logical  Font  Description  Conventions
       document  (called  xlfd)  and  the XLoadFont and XCreateFontSet manual pages.  Some useful font utilities
       are: xlsfonts, xfontsel, xfd and xset.

       If you have Xft support you can specify an Xft font name (description) of a true  type  (or  Type1)  font
       prefixed by "xft:", for example:

           "xft:Luxi Mono"
           "xft:Luxi Mono:Medium:Roman:size=14:encoding=iso8859-1"

       The  "first"  font  which  matches  the  description is loaded.  This first font depends on the XftConfig
       configuration file with Xft1 and on the /etc/fonts/fonts.conf file with  Xft2.   One  may  read  the  Xft
       manual  page  and  the  fontconfig  man  page with Xft2.  The first string which follows "xft:" is always
       considered as the family.  With the second example Luxi Mono is the Family  (Other  XFree  TTF  families:
       "Luxi  Serif", "Luxi Sans"), Medium is the Weight (other possible weights: Light, DemiBold, Bold, Black),
       Roman is the slant or the style (other possibilities: Regular, Oblique, Italic) size specifies the  point
       size  (for  a  pixel size use pixelsize=), encoding allows for enforce a charset (iso8859-1 or iso10646-1
       only; if no encoding is given the locale charset is assumed).  An important parameter is  "minspace=bool"
       where  bool  is  True  or False.  If bool is False (the default?) Xft gives a greater font height to fvwm
       than if bool is True.  This may modify text placement, icon and window  title  height,  line  spacing  in
       menus  and  FvwmIdent,  button height in some fvwm modules ...etc.  With a LCD monitor you may try to add
       "rgba=mode" where mode is either rgb, bgr, vrgb or vbgr to enable  subpixel  rendering.   The  best  mode
       depends  on  the  way  your LCD cells are arranged.  You can pass other specifications in between ":", as
       "foundry=foundry_name",  "spacing=type"  where  type  can  be  monospace,   proportional   or   charcell,
       "charwidth=integer", "charheight=integer" or "antialias=bool" where bool is True or False.  It seems that
       these parameters are not always taken in account.

       To determine which Xft fonts are really loaded you can export XFT_DEBUG=1 before starting fvwm and take a
       look  to  the error log.  With Xft2 you may use fc-list to list the available fonts.  Anyway, Xft support
       is experimental (from the X and the fvwm point of view) and the  quality  of  the  rendering  depends  on
       number of parameters (the XFree and the freetype versions and your video card(s)).

       After an Xft font name you can add after a ";" an XLFD font name (simple or extended) as:

           xft:Verdana:pixelsize=14;-adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--14-*

       then,  if  either  loading  the  Xft  font  fails  or  fvwm  has  no  Xft  support,  fvwm  loads the font
       "-adobe-courier-bold-r-normal--14-*".  This allows for writing portable configuration files.

   Font and string encoding
       Once a font is loaded, fvwm finds its encoding (or charset) using its name (the last two  fields  of  the
       name).   fvwm assumes that the strings which are displayed with this font use this encoding (an exception
       is that if an iso10646-1 font is loaded, then UTF-8  is  assumed  for  string  encoding).   In  a  normal
       situation,  (i) a font is loaded by giving a font name without specifying the encoding, (ii) the encoding
       of the loaded font is the locale encoding, and then (iii) the strings in  the  fvwm  configuration  files
       should  use  the  locale  encoding  as  well  as the window and icon name.  With Xft the situation is bit
       different as Xft supports only iso10646-1 and iso8859-1.  If you do not specify one of these encodings in
       the Xft font name, then fvwm does strings conversion using (iii).  Note that with multibyte fonts (and in
       particular with "CJK" fonts) for good text rendering, the locale encoding should be the  charset  of  the
       font.

       To  override the previous rules, it is possible to specify the string encoding in the beginning of a font
       description as follow:

           StringEncoding=enc:_full_font_name_

       where enc is an encoding supported by fvwm (usually font name charset plus some unicode encodings: UTF-8,
       USC-2, USC-4 and UTF-16).

       For example, you may use an iso8859-1 locale charset  and  have  an  FvwmForm  in  Russian  using  koi8-r
       encoding.   In  this case, you just have to ask FvwmForm to load a koi8-r font by specifying the encoding
       in the font name.  With a multibyte language, (as multibyte font works well only if the  locale  encoding
       is the charset of the font), you should use an iso10646-1 font:

           StringEncoding=jisx0208.1983-0:-*-fixed-medium-r-*-ja-*-iso10646-1

       or

           "StringEncoding=jisx0208.1983-0:xft:Bitstream Cyberbit"

       if  your  FvwmForm  configuration  uses  jisx0208.1983-0  encoding.   Another possibility is to use UTF-8
       encoding for your FvwmForm configuration and use an iso10646-1 font:

           -*-fixed-medium-r-*-ja-*-iso10646-1

       or

           "StringEncoding=UTF-8:xft:Bitstream Cyberbit"

       or equivalently

           "xft:Bitstream Cyberbit:encoding=iso10646-1"

       In general iso10646-1 fonts together with UTF-8 string encoding allows the display of any characters in a
       given menu, FvwmForm etc.

       More and more, unicode is used and text files use UTF-8 encoding.  However, in  practice  the  characters
       used  range  over  your  locale charset (this is the case when you generate a menu with fvwm-menu-desktop
       with recent versions of KDE and GNOME).  For saving memory (an iso10646-1 font  may  have  a  very  large
       number  of  characters)  or because you have a pretty font without an iso10646-1 charset, you can specify
       the string encoding to be UTF-8 and use a font in the locale charset:

           StringEncoding=UTF-8:-*-pretty_font-*-12-*

       In most cases, fvwm correctly determines the encoding of the font.  However, some fonts do not  end  with
       valid encoding names.  When the font name isn't normal, for example:

           -misc-fixed-*--20-*-my_utf8-36

       you need to add the encoding after the font name using a slash as a delimiter.  For example:

           MenuStyle * Font -misc-fixed-*--20-*-my_utf8-36/iso10646-1

       If  fvwm  finds  an  encoding,  fvwm  uses the iconv system functions to do conversion between encodings.
       Unfortunately, there are no standards.  For conversion between iso8859-1 and UTF-8:  a  GNU  system  uses
       "ISO-8859-1"  and  other  systems use "iso881" to define the converters (these two names are supported by
       fvwm).  Moreover, in some cases it may be necessary to use  machine  specific  converters.   So,  if  you
       experience  problems  you  can try to get information on your iconv implementation ("man iconv" may help)
       and put the name which defines the converter between the font encoding and UTF-8 at the end of  the  font
       name  after  the  encoding  hint and a / (another possible solution is to use GNU libiconv).  For example
       use:

           Style * Font -misc-fixed-*--14-*-iso8859-1/*/latin1

       to use latin1 for defining the converter for the iso8859-1 encoding.  The "*" in between the "/" says  to
       fvwm to determine the encoding from the end of the font name.  Use:

           Style * Font \
                -misc-fixed-*--14-*-local8859-6/iso8859-6/local_iso8859_6_iconv

       to  force  fvwm to use the font with iso8859-6 as the encoding (this is useful for bi-directionality) and
       to use local_iso8859_6_iconv for defining the converters.

   Font Shadow Effects
       Fonts can be given  3d  effects.   At  the  beginning  of  the  font  name  (or  just  after  a  possible
       StringEncoding specification) add

           Shadow=size [offset] [directions]]:

       size  is  a  positive  integer  which  specifies  the  number of pixels of shadow.  offset is an optional
       positive integer which defines the number of pixels to offset the shadow from the edge of the  character.
       The  default  offset  is  zero.  directions is an optional set of directions the shadow emanates from the
       character.  The directions are a space separated list of fvwm directions:

       N, North, Top, t, Up, u, -

       E, East, Right, r, Right, r, ]

       S, South, Bottom, b, Down, d, _

       W, West, Left, l, Left, l, [

       NE, NorthEast, TopRight, tr, UpRight, ur, ^

       SE, SouthEast, BottomRight, br, DownRight, dr, >

       SW, SouthWest, BottomLeft, bl, DownLeft, dl, v

       NW, NorthWest, TopLeft, tl, UpLeft, ul, <

       C, Center, Centre, .

       A shadow is displayed in each given direction.  All is equivalent to all  the  directions.   The  default
       direction  is BottomRight.  With the Center direction, the shadow surrounds the whole string.  Since this
       is a super set of all other directions, it is a waste of time  to  specify  this  along  with  any  other
       directions.

       The shadow effect only works with colorsets.  The color of the shadow is defined by using the fgsh option
       of the Colorset command.  Please refer to the Colorsets section for details about colorsets.

       Note:  It can be difficult to find the font, fg, fgsh and bg colors to make this effect look good, but it
       can look quite good.

BI-DIRECTIONAL TEXT

       Arabic and Hebrew text require bi-directional text support to be displayed  correctly,  this  means  that
       logical  strings should be converted before their visual presentation, so left-to-right and right-to-left
       sub-strings are determined and reshuffled.  In fvwm this is done automatically in window  titles,  menus,
       module  labels and other places if the fonts used for displaying the text are of one of the charsets that
       require bidi (bi-directional) support.  For example, this includes iso8859-6,  iso8859-8  and  iso10646-1
       (unicode), but not other iso8859-* fonts.

       This bi-directional text support is done using the fribidi library compile time option, see INSTALL.fvwm.

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS

       Almost all window manager operations can be performed from the keyboard so mouse-less operation should be
       possible.   In  addition  to  scrolling  around  the  virtual  desktop  by  binding the Scroll command to
       appropriate keys, Popup, Move, Resize, and any other command can be bound to keys.   Once  a  command  is
       started  the pointer is moved by using the up, down, left, and right arrows, and the action is terminated
       by pressing return.  Holding down the Shift key causes the pointer movement to go  in  larger  steps  and
       holding  down  the control key causes the pointer movement to go in smaller steps.  Standard emacs and vi
       cursor movement controls ( n , p , f , b , and j , k , h , l ) can be used instead of the arrow keys.

SESSION MANAGEMENT

       Fvwm supports session management according to the X Session Management Protocol.  It saves  and  restores
       window  position, size, stacking order, desk, stickiness, shadiness, maximizedness, iconifiedness for all
       windows.  Furthermore, some global state is saved.

       Fvwm doesn't save any information regarding styles, decors, functions or menus.  If  you  change  any  of
       these  resources  during  a  session  (e.g. by issuing Style commands or by using various modules), these
       changes are lost after saving and restarting the session.  To become permanent, such changes have  to  be
       added to the configuration file.

       Note  further  that  the  current  implementation  has  the following anomaly when used on a multi-screen
       display: Starting fvwm for the first time, fvwm manages all screens by forking a copy of itself for  each
       screen.   Every copy knows its parent and issuing a Quit command to any instance of fvwm kills the master
       and thus all copies of fvwm.  When you save and restart the session, the session manager brings up a copy
       of fvwm on each screen, but this time they are started as individual instances managing one screen  only.
       Thus  a Quit kills only the copy it was sent to.  This is probably not a very serious problem, since with
       session management, you are supposed to quit a session through the session  manager  anyway.   If  it  is
       really needed,

           Exec exec killall fvwm

       still kills all copies of fvwm.  Your system must have the killall command though.

BOOLEAN ARGUMENTS

       A  number  of commands take one or several boolean arguments.  These take a few equivalent inputs: "yes",
       "on", "true", "t" and "y" all evaluate to true while "no", "off", "false", "f" and "n" evaluate to false.
       Some commands allow "toggle" too which means that the feature is disabled if it is currently enabled  and
       vice versa.

BUILTIN KEY AND MOUSE BINDINGS

       The following commands are built-in to fvwm:

           Key Help R A Popup MenuFvwmRoot
           Key F1 R A Popup MenuFvwmRoot
           Key Tab A M WindowList Root c c NoDeskSort
           Key Escape A MC EscapeFunc
           Mouse 1 R A Menu MenuFvwmRoot
           Mouse 1 T   A FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX Move
           Mouse 1 FS  A FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX Resize
           Mouse 2 FST A FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX Move
           AddToFunc FuncFvwmRaiseLowerX
           + I Raise
           + M $0
           + D Lower

       The Help and F1 keys invoke a built-in menu that fvwm creates.  This is primarily for new users that have
       not  created their own configuration file.  Either key on the root (background) window pops up an menu to
       help you get started.

       The Tab key pressed anywhere with the Meta key (same as the Alt key on PC keyboards) held down pop-ups  a
       window list.

       Mouse button 1 on the title-bar or side frame can move, raise or lower a window.

       Mouse button 1 on the window corners can resize, raise or lower a window.

       You can override or remove these bindings.  To remove the window list binding, use this:

           Key Tab A M -

COMMAND EXECUTION

   Module and Function Commands
       If  fvwm encounters a command that it doesn't recognize, it checks to see if the specified command should
       have been

           Function (rest of command)

       or

           Module (rest of command)

       This allows complex functions or modules to be invoked in a manner which is  fairly  transparent  to  the
       configuration file.

       Example: the config file contains the line

           HelpMe

       Fvwm  looks  for  an  fvwm  command called "HelpMe", and fails.  Next it looks for a user-defined complex
       function called "HelpMe".  If no such function exists, fvwm tries to execute a module called "HelpMe".

   Delayed Execution of Commands
       Note: There are many commands that affect look and feel of specific, some or  all  windows,  like  Style,
       Mouse,  Colorset,  TitleStyle  and  many  others.   For  performance reasons such changes are not applied
       immediately but only  when  fvwm  is  idle,  i.e.  no  user  interaction  or  module  input  is  pending.
       Specifically,  new  Style options that are set in a function are not applied until after the function has
       completed.  This can sometimes lead to unwanted effects.

       To force that all pending changes are applied immediately, use the UpdateStyles, Refresh or RefreshWindow
       commands.

QUOTING

       Quotes are required only when needed to make fvwm consider two or more words to  be  a  single  argument.
       Unnecessary  quoting is allowed.  If you want a quote character in your text, you must escape it by using
       the backslash character.  For example, if you have a pop-up menu called "Window-Ops",  then  you  do  not
       need quotes:

           Popup Window-Ops

       but if you replace the dash with a space, then you need quotes:

           Popup "Window Ops"

       The  supported  quoting characters are double quotes, single quotes and reverse single quotes.  All three
       kinds of quotes are treated in the same way.  Single characters can be quoted with a preceding backslash.
       Quoting single characters works even inside other kinds of quotes.

COMMAND EXPANSION

       Whenever an fvwm command line is executed, fvwm performs parameter  expansion.   A  parameter  is  a  '$'
       followed  by  a  word enclosed in brackets ($[...]) or a single special character.  If fvwm encounters an
       unquoted parameter on the command line it expands it  to  a  string  indicated  by  the  parameter  name.
       Unknown  parameters  are  left  untouched.   Parameter  expansion  is performed before quoting.  To get a
       literal '$' use "$$".

       If a command is prefixed with a '-' parameter expansion isn't performed.  This  applies  to  the  command
       immediately  following  the  '-',  in  which  the  expansion normally would have taken place.  When uesed
       together with other prefix commands it must be added before the other prefix.

       Example:

           Pick -Exec exec xmessage '$[w.name]'

       opens an xmessage dialog with "$[w.name]" unexpanded.

       The longer variables may contain additional variables inside the name,  which  are  expanded  before  the
       outer variable.

       In  earlier  versions  of fvwm, some single letter variables were supported.  It is deprecated now, since
       they cause a number of problems.  You should use the longer substitutes instead.

       Example:

           # Print the current desk number, horizontal page number
           # and the window's class (unexpanded here, no window).
           Echo $[desk.n] $[page.nx] $[w.class]

       Note: If the command is called outside a window context, it prints  "$[w.class]"  instead  of  the  class
       name.   It  is  usually  not enough to have the pointer over a window to have a context window.  To force
       using the window with the focus, the Current command can be used:

           Current Echo $[desk.n] $[page.nx] $[w.class]

       The parameters known by fvwm are:

       $$
           A literal '$'.

       $.
           The absolute directory of the currently Read file.  Intended for creating  relative  and  relocatable
           configuration trees.  If used outside of any read file, the returned value is '.'.

       $0 to $9
           The  positional  parameters  given  to  a complex function (a function that has been defined with the
           AddToFunc command).  "$0" is replaced with the first parameter, "$1" with the second parameter and so
           on.  If the corresponding parameter is undefined, the "$..." is deleted from the command line.

       $*
           All positional parameters given to a complex function.  This includes parameters  that  follow  after
           "$9".

       $[n]
           The  n:th  positional  parameter  given to a complex function, counting from 0.  If the corresponding
           parameter is undefined, the "$[n]" is deleted from the  command  line.   The  parameter  is  expanded
           unquoted.

       $[n-m]
           The  positional  parameters  given  to  a complex function, starting with parameter n and ending with
           parameter m.  If all the corresponding parameters are undefined, the "$[...]"  is  deleted  from  the
           command  line.   If only some of the parameters are defined, all defined parameters are expanded, and
           the remaining silently ignored.  All parameters are expanded unquoted.

       $[n-]
           All the positional parameters given to a complex function, starting with parameter  n.   If  all  the
           corresponding  parameters  are  undefined,  the  "$[...]"  is  deleted  from  the  command line.  All
           parameters are expanded unquoted.

       $[*]
           All the positional parameters given to a complex function.  This is equivalent of $[0-].

       $[version.num]
           The version number, like "2.6.0".

       $[version.info]
           The version info, like " (from cvs)", empty for the official releases.

       $[version.line]
           The first line printed by the --version command line option.

       $[vp.x] $[vp.y] $[vp.width] $[vp.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the current viewport.

       $[wa.x] $[wa.y] $[wa.width] $[wa.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the EWMH working area.

       $[dwa.x] $[dwa.y] $[dwa.width] $[dwa.height]
           Either coordinate or the width or height of the dynamic EWMH working area.

       $[desk.n]
           The current desk number.

       $[desk.name<n>]
           These parameters are replaced with the name of the desktop  number  <n>  that  is  defined  with  the
           DesktopName command.  If no name is defined, then the default name is returned.

       $[desk.width] $[desk.height]
           The  width or height of the whole desktop, i.e. the width or height multiplied by the number of pages
           in x or y direction.

       $[desk.pagesx] $[desk.pagesy]
           The number of total pages in a desk in x or y direction.  This is the  same  as  the  values  set  by
           DesktopSize.

       $[page.nx] $[page.ny]
           The  current page numbers, by X and Y axes, starting from 0.  page is equivalent to area in the GNOME
           terminology.

       $[w.id]
           The window-id (expressed in hex, e.g. 0x10023c) of the window the command was called for or "$[w.id]"
           if no window is associated with the command.

       $[w.name]  $[w.iconname]  $[w.class]  $[w.resource]  $[w.visiblename]   $[w.iconfile]   $[w.miniiconfile]
       $[w.iconfile.svgopts] $[w.miniiconfile.svgopts]
           The  window's  name, icon name, resource class and resource name, visible name, file name of its icon
           or mini icon defined with the Icon or MiniIcon style (including the full path if the file  was  found
           on  disk),  and  (if  fvwm  is compiled with SVG support) the icon or mini icon svg rendering options
           (including the leading colon), or unexpanded "$[w.<attribute>]" string if  no  window  is  associated
           with the command.

           Note,  the  first  5 variables may include any kind of characters, so these variables are quoted.  It
           means that the value is surrounded by single quote characters  and  any  contained  single  quote  is
           prefixed with a backslash.  This guarantees that commands like:

               Style $[w.resource] Icon norm/network.png

           work  correctly,  regardless  of any special symbols the value may contain, like spaces and different
           kinds of quotes.

           In the case of the window's visible name, this is the value returned from the literal  title  of  the
           window  shown  in the titlebar.  Typically this will be the same as $[w.name] once expanded, although
           in the case of using IndexedWindowName then this  is  more  useful  a  distinction,  and  allows  for
           referencing the specific window by its visible name for inclusion in things like Style commands.

       $[w.x] $[w.y] $[w.width] $[w.height]
           Either  coordinate or the width or height of the current window if it is not iconified.  If no window
           is associated with the command or the window is iconified, the string is left as is.

       $[w.desk]
           The number of the desk on which the window is shown.  If the window is sticky the current desk number
           is used.

       $[w.layer]
           The layer of the window.

       $[w.screen]
           The screen number the window is on.  If Xinerama is not present, this returns the number 0.

       $[cw.x] $[cw.y] $[cw.width] $[cw.height]
           These work like $[w....] but return the geometry of the client part of the window.  In  other  words:
           the border and title of the window is not taken into account.

       $[i.x],  $[it.x],  $[ip.x]  $[i.y],  $[it.y],  $[ip.y]  $[i.width], $[it.width], $[ip.width] $[i.height],
       $[it.height], $[ip.height]
           These work like $[w....] but return the geometry of the icon ($[i....]), the icon  title  ($[it....])
           or the icon picture ($[ip....]).

       $[pointer.x] $[pointer.y]
           These  return  the position of the pointer on the screen.  If the pointer is not on the screen, these
           variables are not expanded.

       $[pointer.wx] $[pointer.wy]
           These return the position of the pointer in the selected window.   If  the  pointer  is  not  on  the
           screen, the window is iconified or no window is selected, these variables are not expanded.

       $[pointer.cx] $[pointer.cy]
           These  return  the  position  of  the  pointer  in the client portion of the selected window.  If the
           pointer is not on the screen, the window is shaded or iconified  or  no  window  is  selected,  these
           variables are not expanded.

       $[pointer.screen]
           The screen number the pointer is currently on.  Returns 0 if Xinerama is not enabled.

       $[screen]
           The screen number fvwm is running on.  Useful for setups with multiple screens.

       $[fg.cs<n>] $[bg.cs<n>] $[hilight.cs<n>] $[shadow.cs<n>]
           These  parameters  are  replaced  with  the  name  of  the  foreground (fg), background (bg), hilight
           (hilight) or shadow (shadow) color that is defined in colorset  <n>  (replace  <n>  with  zero  or  a
           positive  integer).   For  example  "$[fg.cs3]"  is  expanded  to the name of the foreground color of
           colorset 3 (in rgb:rrrr/gggg/bbbb form).  Please refer to the Colorsets  section  for  details  about
           colorsets.

       $[schedule.last]
           This  is replaced by the id of the last command that was scheduled with the Schedule command, even if
           this command was already executed.

       $[schedule.next]
           This is replaced by the id the next command used with Schedule will get (unless  a  different  id  is
           specified explicitly).

       $[cond.rc]
           The  return  code of the last conditional command.  This variable is only valid inside a function and
           can not be used in a conditional command.  Please refer to the section Conditional  Commands  in  the
           command list.

       $[func.context]
           The  context  character of the running command as used in the Mouse, Key or PointerKey command.  This
           is useful for example with:

               Mouse 3 FS N WindowShade $$[func.context]

       $[gt.str]
           return the translation of str by looking in the current locale catalogs.  If no translation is  found
           str is returned as is.  See the LocalePath command.

       $[infostore.key]
           Return  the  value  of  the item stored in the InfoStore at the given key.  If no key is present, the
           unexpanded string is returned.

       $[...]
           If the string within the braces is neither of the above, fvwm tries to find an  environment  variable
           with  this name and replaces its value if one is found (e.g. "$[PAGER]" could be replaced by "more").
           Otherwise the string is left as is.

       Some examples can be found in the description of the AddToFunc command.

SCRIPTING & COMPLEX FUNCTIONS

       To achieve the more complex effects, fvwm has a number of commands that improve its scripting  abilities.
       Scripts  can  be  read  from a file with Read, from the output of a command with PipeRead or written as a
       complex function with the AddToFunc command.  For the curious, section 7 of the fvwm FAQ shows some  real
       life  applications  of  scripting.   Please  refer  to the sections User Functions and Shell Commands and
       Conditional Commands for details.  A word of warning: during execution of complex functions,  fvwm  needs
       to take all input from the mouse pointer (the pointer is "grabbed" in the slang of X).  No other programs
       can  receive  any  input  from the pointer while a function is run.  This can confuse some programs.  For
       example, the xwd program refuses to make screen shots when run from a complex function.  To  achieve  the
       same functionality you can use the Read or PipeRead command instead.

LIST OF FVWM COMMANDS

       The  command  descriptions  below  are  grouped  together  in  the  following sections.  The sections are
       hopefully sorted in order of usefulness to the newcomer.

       •   Menu commands

       •   Miscellaneous commands

       •   Commands affecting window movement and placement

       •   Commands for focus and mouse movement

       •   Commands controlling window state

       •   Commands for mouse, key and stroke bindings

       •   The Style command (controlling window styles)

       •   Other commands controlling window styles

       •   Commands controlling the virtual desktop

       •   Commands for user functions and shell commands

       •   Conditional commands

       •   Module commands

       •   Quit, restart and session management commands

       •   Colorsets

       •   Color gradients

   Menus
       Before a menu can be opened, it has to be populated with menu items using the AddToMenu command and bound
       to a key or mouse button with the Key, PointerKey or Mouse command (there are many other ways to invoke a
       menu too).  This is usually done in the configuration file.

       Fvwm menus are extremely configurable in look and feel.  Even the slightest nuances can be changed to the
       user's liking, including the menu item fonts,  the  background,  delays  before  popping  up  sub  menus,
       generating  menus  dynamically  and  many other features.  Please refer to the MenuStyle command to learn
       more.

       Types of Menus
              In fvwm there are four slightly different types of menus:

              Popup menus can appear everywhere on the screen on their own or attached to a part  of  a  window.
              The Popup command opens popup menus.  If the popup menu was invoked with a mouse button held down,
              it  is  closed  when the button is released.  The item under the pointer is then activated and the
              associated action is executed.

              Menu is a very similar command, but the menus it opens are slightly less transient.  When  invoked
              by  clicking a mouse button, it stays open and can be navigated with no button held.  But if it is
              invoked by a button press followed by mouse motion, it behaves exactly like a popup menu.

              Tear off menus or Pin up menus are menus from either of the above  two  commands  that  have  been
              "torn  off"  their  original  context  and  pinned  on the desktop like a normal window.  They are
              created from other menus by certain key presses or mouse sequences or with the TearMenuOff command
              from inside a menu.

              Sub menus are menus inside menus.  When a menu item that has the Popup command as  its  action  is
              selected,  the  named menu is opened as an inferior menu to the parent.  Any type of menu can have
              sub menus.

       Menu Anatomy
              Menus consist of any number of titles which are inactive menu items that usually appear at the top
              of the menu, normal items triggering various actions when selected, separator  lines  between  the
              items, tear off bars (a horizontal broken line) that tear off the menu when selected, and sub menu
              items  indicated  with  a triangle pointing left or right, depending on the direction in which the
              sub menu appears.  All the above menu items are optional.

              Additionally, if the menu is too long to fit on the screen, the excess menu items  are  put  in  a
              continuation  menu  and  a sub menu with the string "More..." is placed at the bottom of the menu.
              The "More..." string honors the locale settings.

              Finally, there may be a picture running up either side of the menu (a "side bar").

       Menu Navigation
              Menus can be navigated either with the keyboard or with the mouse.  Many people prefer to use  the
              mouse, but it can be rather tedious.  Once you get the hang of it, keyboard navigation can be much
              faster.   While  fvwm  displays  a  menu, it can do nothing else.  For example, new windows do not
              appear before the menu is closed.  However, this is not exactly true for tear off menus.  See  the
              Tear Off Menus section for details.

       Mouse Navigation
              Moving  the  pointer  over  a  menu selects the item below it.  Normally this is indicated by a 3d
              border around the item, but not all parts of a menu can be selected.  Pressing  any  mouse  button
              while  a  menu  is  open  by  default activates the item below it.  Items of a popup menu are also
              activated by releasing a held mouse button.  In case of an item that hides a  sub  menu,  the  sub
              menu  is  displayed if the pointer hovers over the item long enough or moves close to the triangle
              indicating the sub menu.  This behaviour can be tuned with menu styles.

              Scrolling a mouse wheel over a menu either wraps the pointer along the menu (default), scrolls the
              menu under the pointer or act as if the menu was clicked depending on the MouseWheel menu style.

              Clicking on a selected item activates it - what happens exactly depends on the type of the item.

              Clicking on a title, a separator, the side bar, or outside the menu closes  the  menu  (exception:
              tear  off  menus  can  not  be  closed  this  way).   Pressing mouse button 2 over a menu title or
              activating a tear off bar creates a tear off menu from the current menu.   Clicking  on  a  normal
              menu  item  invokes the command that is bound to it, and clicking on a sub menu item either closes
              all open menus and replaces them with the sub menu or posts the menu (default).

              Posting menus is meant to ease mouse navigation.  Once a sub menu is posted, only items from  that
              sub  menu  can  be selected.  This can be very useful to navigate the menu if the pointer tends to
              stray off the menu.  To unpost the menu and revert back to normal operation, either click  on  the
              same sub menu item or press any key.

       Keyboard Navigation
              Just  like  with  mouse  navigation,  the item below the pointer is selected.  This is achieved by
              warping the pointer to the menu items when necessary.  While a menu is open, all key  presses  are
              intercepted  by  the  menu.  No other application can get keyboard input (although this is not the
              case for tear off menus).

              Items can be selected directly by pressing a hotkey that can be configured individually  for  each
              menu  item.   The  hotkey  is  indicated  by  underlining  it  in  the  menu item label.  With the
              AutomaticHotkeys menu style fvwm automatically assigns hotkeys to all menu items.

              The most basic keys to navigate through menus are the cursor keys (move up or down one item, enter
              or leave a sub menu), Space (activate item) and Escape (close menu).  Numerous other keys  can  be
              used to navigate through menus by default:

              Enter, Return, Space activate the current item.

              Escape, Delete, Ctrl-G exit the current sequence of menus or destroy a tear off menu.

              J, N, Cursor-Down, Tab, Meta-Tab, Ctrl-F, move to the next item.

              K, P, Cursor-Up, Shift-Tab, Shift-Meta-Tab, Ctrl-B, move to the prior item.

              L, Cursor-Right, F enter a sub menu.

              H, Cursor-Left, B return to the prior menu.

              Ctrl-Cursor-Up, Ctrl-K Ctrl-P, Shift-Ctrl-Meta-Tab, Page-Up move up five items.

              Ctrl-Cursor-Down, Ctrl-J Ctrl-N, Ctrl-Meta-Tab Page-Down move down five items.

              Shift-P, Home, Shift-Cursor-Up, Ctrl-A move to the first item.

              Shift-N, End, Shift-Cursor-Down, Ctrl-E move to the last item.

              Meta-P, Meta-Cursor-Up, Ctrl-Cursor-Left, Shift-Ctrl-Tab, move up just below the next separator.

              Meta-N, Meta-Cursor-Down, Ctrl-Cursor-Right, Ctrl-Tab, move down just below the next separator.

              Insert opens the "More..." sub menu if any.

              Backspace tears off the menu.

       Menu Bindings
              The  keys  and  mouse  buttons used to navigate the menu can be configured using the Key and Mouse
              commands with the special context 'M', possible combined with 'T' for  the  menu  title,  'I'  for
              other menu items, 'S' for any border or sidepic, '[' for left border including a left sidepic, ']'
              for  right  border including a right sidepic, '-' for top border, '_' for bottom border.  The menu
              context uses its own set of actions that can be bound  to  keys  and  mouse  buttons.   These  are
              MenuClose,    MenuCloseAndExec,    MenuEnterContinuation,    MenuEnterSubmenu,   MenuLeaveSubmenu,
              MenuMoveCursor, MenuCursorLeft, MenuCursorRight, MenuSelectItem, MenuScroll and MenuTearOff.

              It is not possible to override the key Escape with no modifiers for closing the menu.  Neither  is
              it possible to undefine mouse button 1, the arrow keys or the enter key for minimal navigation.

              MenuClose exits from the current sequence of menus or destroys a tear off menu.

              MenuCloseAndExec exits from the current sequence of menus or destroys a tear off menu and executes
              the rest of the line as a command.

              MenuEnterContinuation opens the "More..." sub menu if any.

              MenuEnterSubmenu enters a sub menu.

              MenuLeaveSubmenu returns to the prior menu.

              MenuMoveCursor  n  [m]  moves  the  selection  to another item.  If the first argument is zero the
              second argument specifies an absolute item in the menu to move the pointer to.  Negative items are
              counted from the end of the menu.  If the first argument is non-zero, the second argument must  be
              omitted,  and  the first argument specifies a relative change in the selected item.  The positions
              may be suffixed with a 's' to indicate that the items should refer only to the first  items  after
              separators.

              MenuCursorLeft  enters  a sub menu with the SubmenusLeft menu style, and returns to the prior menu
              with the SubmenusRight menu style.

              MenuCursorRight enters a sub menu with the SubmenusRight menu style, and returns to the prior menu
              with the SubmenusLeft menu style.

              MenuSelectItem triggers the action for the menu item.

              MenuScroll n performs menu scrolling according to the MouseWheel menu style  with  n  items.   The
              distance  can  be  suffixed with an 's' to indicate the items should refer only to the first items
              after separators.

              MenuTearOff turns a normal menu into a "torn off" menu.  See Tear Off Menus for details.

       Tear Off Menus
              A tear off menu is any menu that has been "torn off" the window it was attached to and  pinned  to
              the  root  window.   There  are  three ways to tear off a menu: click on the menu title with mouse
              button 2, press Backspace in the menu or activate its tear off bar (a horizontal bar with a broken
              line).  Tear off bars must be added to the menu as any other item by assigning  them  the  command
              TearMenuOff.

              The  builtin  tear  off  actions can be overridden by undefining the builtin menu actions bound to
              tear off.  To remove the builtin mouse button 2 binding, use:

                  Mouse 2 MT A -

              and to remove the builtin backspace binding, use:

                  Key Backspace M A -

              See the section Menu Bindings for details on how to assign other bindings for tear off.

              Note that prior to fvwm 2.5.20 the tear off mouse bindings were redefined in different way,  which
              no longer work.

              The  window  containing the menu is placed as any other window would be.  If you find it confusing
              to have your tear off menus appear at random positions on  the  screen,  put  this  line  in  your
              configuration file:

                  Style fvwm_menu UsePPosition

              To remove borders and buttons from a tear-off menu but keep the menu title, you can use

                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 0, !Button 1
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 2, !Button 3
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 4, !Button 5
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 6, !Button 7
                  Style fvwm_menu !Button 8, !Button 9
                  Style fvwm_menu Title, HandleWidth 0

              A  tear  off  menu  is  a  cross breeding between a window and a menu.  The menu is swallowed by a
              window and its title is stripped off and displayed in the window title.   The  main  advantage  is
              that  the  menu becomes permanent - activating an item does not close the menu.  Therefore, it can
              be used multiple times without reopening it.  To destroy such a menu, close its  window  or  press
              the Escape key.

              Tear  off  menus  behave somewhat differently than normal menus and windows.  They do not take the
              keyboard focus, but while the pointer is over one of them, all key presses are sent to  the  menu.
              Other  fvwm key bindings are disabled as long as the pointer is inside the tear off menu or one of
              its sub menus.  When the pointer leaves this area, all sub menus  are  closed  immediately.   Note
              that the window containing a tear off menu is never hilighted as if it had the focus.

              A  tear  off  menu  is  an  independent  copy  of the menu it originated from.  As such, it is not
              affected by adding items to that menu or changing its menu style.

              To create a tear off menu without opening the normal menu first, the option TearOffImmediately can
              be added to the Menu or Popup command.

       AddToMenu menu-name [menu-label action]
              Begins or adds to a menu definition.  Typically a menu definition looks like this:

                  AddToMenu Utilities Utilities Title
                   + Xterm           Exec  exec xterm -e tcsh
                   + Rxvt            Exec  exec rxvt
                   + "Remote Logins" Popup Remote-Logins
                   + Top             Exec  exec rxvt -T Top -n Top -e top
                   + Calculator      Exec  exec xcalc
                   + Xman            Exec  exec xman
                   + Xmag            Exec  exec xmag
                   + emacs           Exec  exec xemacs
                   + Mail            MailFunction xmh "-font fixed"
                   + ""              Nop
                   + Modules         Popup Module-Popup
                   + ""              Nop
                   + Exit Fvwm       Popup Quit-Verify

              The menu could be invoked via

                  Mouse 1 R A Menu Utilities Nop

              or

                  Mouse 1 R A Popup Utilities

              There is no end-of-menu symbol.  Menus do not have to be defined in a  contiguous  region  of  the
              config  file.   The  quoted (or first word) portion in the above examples is the menu label, which
              appears in the menu when the user pops it up.  The remaining portion is an fvwm command  which  is
              executed  if  the  user selects that menu item.  An empty menu-label ("") and the Nop function are
              used to insert a separator into the menu.

              The keywords DynamicPopUpAction and DynamicPopDownAction have a special meaning when used  as  the
              name  of a menu item.  The action following the keyword is executed whenever the menu is popped up
              or down.  This way you can implement dynamic menus.  It is even possible to  destroy  itself  with
              DestroyMenu  and  the rebuild from scratch.  When the menu has been destroyed (unless you used the
              recreate option when destroying the menu), do not forget to add the dynamic action again.

              Note: Do not trigger actions that require user interaction.  They may fail and may screw  up  your
              menus.  See the Silent command.

              Warning  Do  not  issue  MenuStyle  commands  as dynamic menu actions.  Chances are good that this
              crashes fvwm.

              There are several configurable scripts installed together with fvwm for automatic menu generation.
              They  have  their  own  man  pages.   Some   of   them,   specifically   fvwm-menu-directory   and
              fvwm-menu-desktop,  may be used with DynamicPopupAction to create a directory listing or GNOME/KDE
              application listing.

              Example (File browser):

                  # You can find the shell script fvwm_make_browse_menu.sh
                  # in the utils/ directory of the distribution.
                  AddToMenu BrowseMenu
                  + DynamicPopupAction PipeRead \
                    'fvwm_make_browse_menu.sh BrowseMenu'

              Example (Picture menu):

                  # Build a menu of all .jpg files in
                  # $HOME/Pictures
                  AddToMenu JpgMenu foo title
                  + DynamicPopupAction Function MakeJpgMenu

                  AddToFunc MakeJpgMenu
                  + I DestroyMenu recreate JpgMenu
                  + I AddToMenu JpgMenu Pictures Title
                  + I PipeRead 'for i in $HOME/Pictures/*.jpg; \
                    do echo AddToMenu JpgMenu "`basename $i`" Exec xv $i; done'

              The keyword MissingSubmenuFunction has a similar meaning.  It is executed whenever you try to  pop
              up  a  sub  menu  that does not exist.  With this function you can define and destroy menus on the
              fly.  You can use any command after the keyword, but if the name of an item (that  is  a  submenu)
              defined with AddToFunc follows it, fvwm executes this command:

                  Function <function-name> <submenu-name>

              i.e. the name is passed to the function as its first argument and can be referred to with "$0".

              The  fvwm-menu-directory  script mentioned above may be used with MissingSubmenuFunction to create
              an up to date recursive directory listing.

              Example:

                  # There is another shell script fvwm_make_directory_menu.sh
                  # in the utils/ directory of the distribution. To use it,
                  # define this function in your configuration file:

                  DestroyFunc MakeMissingDirectoryMenu
                  AddToFunc MakeMissingDirectoryMenu
                  + I PipeRead fvwm_make_directory_menu.sh $0

                  DestroyMenu SomeMenu
                  AddToMenu SomeMenu
                  + MissingSubmenuFunction MakeMissingDirectoryMenu
                  + "Root directory" Popup /

              This is another implementation of the file browser that uses sub menus for subdirectories.

              Titles can be used within the menu.  If you add the option top behind the keyword Title, the title
              is added to the top of the menu.  If there was a title already, it is overwritten.

                  AddToMenu Utilities Tools Title top

              All text up to the first Tab in the menu label is aligned to the left side of the menu,  all  text
              right of the first Tab is aligned to the left in a second column and all text thereafter is placed
              right  aligned  in  the  third column.  All other Tab s are replaced by spaces.  Note that you can
              change this format with the ItemFormat option of the MenuStyle command.

              If the menu-label contains an ampersand ('&'), the next character is taken as a  hot-key  for  the
              menu  item.   Hot-keys  are underlined in the label.  To get a literal '&', insert "&&".  Pressing
              the hot-key moves through the list of menu items with this hot-key or selects an item that is  the
              only one with this hot-key.

              If the menu-label contains a sub-string which is set off by stars, then the text between the stars
              is  expected  to be the name of an image file to insert in the menu.  To get a literal '*', insert
              "**".  For example

                  + Calculator*xcalc.xpm* Exec exec xcalc

              inserts a menu item labeled "Calculator" with a picture of a calculator above it.  The following:

                  + *xcalc.xpm*           Exec exec xcalc

              Omits the "Calculator" label, but leaves the picture.

              If the menu-label contains a sub-string which is set off by percent signs, then the  text  between
              the percent signs is expected to be the name of image file (a so called mini icon to insert to the
              left  of  the  menu  label.  A second mini icon that is drawn at the right side of the menu can be
              given in the same way.  To get a literal '%', insert "%%".  For example

                  + Calculator%xcalc.xpm% Exec exec xcalc

              inserts a menu item labeled "Calculator" with  a  picture  of  a  calculator  to  the  left.   The
              following:

                  + %xcalc.xpm%           Exec exec xcalc

              Omits  the "Calculator" label, but leaves the picture.  The pictures used with this feature should
              be small (perhaps 16x16).

              If the menu-name (not the label) contains a sub-string which is set off by at  signs  ('@'),  then
              the  text  between them is expected to be the name of an image file to draw along the left side of
              the menu (a side pixmap).  You may want to  use  the  SidePic  option  of  the  MenuStyle  command
              instead.  To get a literal '@', insert "@@".  For example

                  AddToMenu StartMenu@linux-menu.xpm@

              creates a menu with a picture in its bottom left corner.

              If  the  menu-name  also  contains  a sub-string surrounded by '^'s, then the text between '^'s is
              expected to be the name of an X11 color and the column containing the side picture is colored with
              that color.  You can set this color for a menu style using the SideColor option of  the  MenuStyle
              command.  To get a literal '^', insert "^^".  Example:

                  AddToMenu StartMenu@linux-menu.xpm@^blue^

              creates  a  menu  with  a picture in its bottom left corner and colors with blue the region of the
              menu containing the picture.

              In all the above cases, the name of  the  resulting  menu  is  name  specified,  stripped  of  the
              substrings between the various delimiters.

       ChangeMenuStyle menustyle menu ...
              Changes  the  menu style of menu to menustyle.  You may specify more than one menu in each call of
              ChangeMenuStyle.

       CopyMenuStyle orig-menustyle dest-menustyle
              Copy orig-menustyle to dest-menustyle, where orig-menustyle is an existing  menu  style.   If  the
              menu style dest_menustyle does not exist, then it is created.

       DestroyMenu [recreate] menu
              Deletes  a  menu,  so  that  subsequent references to it are no longer valid.  You can use this to
              change the contents of a menu during an fvwm session.  The menu can be  rebuilt  using  AddToMenu.
              The optional parameter recreate tells fvwm not to throw away the menu completely but to throw away
              all the menu items (including the title).

                  DestroyMenu Utilities

       DestroyMenuStyle menustyle
              Deletes  the  menu  style  named  menustyle  and changes all menus using this style to the default
              style, you cannot destroy the default menu style.

                  DestroyMenuStyle pixmap1

       Menu menu-name [position] [double-click-action]
              Causes a previously defined menu to be popped up in a sticky manner.  That is, if the user invokes
              the menu with a click  action  instead  of  a  drag  action,  the  menu  stays  up.   The  command
              double-click-action  is  invoked if the user double-clicks a button (or hits the key rapidly twice
              if the menu is bound to a key) when bringing up the menu.  If  the  double  click  action  is  not
              specified, double clicking on the menu does nothing.  However, if the menu begins with a menu item
              (i.e.  not  with a title or a separator) and the double click action is not given, double clicking
              invokes the first item of the menu (but only if the pointer really was over the item).

              The pointer is warped to where it was when the menu was invoked if it was both invoked and  closed
              with a keystroke.

              The  position  arguments allow placement of the menu somewhere on the screen, for example centered
              on the visible screen or above a  title  bar.   Basically  it  works  like  this:  you  specify  a
              context-rectangle  and  an  offset to this rectangle by which the upper left corner of the menu is
              moved from the upper left corner of the rectangle.  The  position  arguments  consist  of  several
              parts:

              [context-rectangle] x y [special-options]

              The context-rectangle can be one of:

              Root
                  the root window of the current screen.

              XineramaRoot
                  the root window of the whole Xinerama screen.  Equivalent to "root" when Xinerama is not used.

              Mouse
                  a 1x1 rectangle at the mouse position.

              Window
                  the frame of the context window.

              Interior
                  the inside of the context window.

              Title
                  the title of the context window or icon.

              Button<n>
                  button #n of the context window.

              Icon
                  the icon of the context window.

              Menu
                  the current menu.

              Item
                  the current menu item.

              Context
                  the current window, menu or icon.

              This
                  whatever widget the pointer is on (e.g. a corner of a window or the root window).

              Rectangle <geometry>
                  the  rectangle  defined  by <geometry> in X geometry format.  Width and height default to 1 if
                  omitted.

              If the context-rectangle is omitted or illegal (e.g. "item" on a window), "Mouse" is the  default.
              Note  that not all of these make sense under all circumstances (e.g. "Icon" if the pointer is on a
              menu).

              The offset values x and y specify how far the  menu  is  moved  from  its  default  position.   By
              default,  the  numeric value given is interpreted as a percentage of the context rectangle's width
              (height), but with a trailing 'm' the menu's  width  (height)  is  used  instead.   Furthermore  a
              trailing 'p' changes the interpretation to mean pixels.

              Instead  of  a  single value you can use a list of values.  All additional numbers after the first
              one are separated from their predecessor by their sign.  Do not use any other separators.

              If x or y are prefixed with "'o<number>" where <number> is an integer, the menu and the  rectangle
              are moved to overlap at the specified position before any other offsets are applied.  The menu and
              the  rectangle are placed so that the pixel at <number> percent of the rectangle's width/height is
              right over the pixel at <number> percent of the menu's  width/height.   So  "o0"  means  that  the
              top/left  borders of the menu and the rectangle overlap, with "o100" it's the bottom/right borders
              and if you use "o50" they are centered upon each other (try it and you will see it is much simpler
              than this description).  The default is "o0".  The  prefix  "o<number>"  is  an  abbreviation  for
              "+<number>-<number>m".

              A prefix of 'c' is equivalent to "o50".  Examples:

                  # window list in the middle of the screen
                  WindowList Root c c

                  # menu to the left of a window
                  Menu name window -100m c+0

                  # popup menu 8 pixels above the mouse pointer
                  Popup name mouse c -100m-8p

                  # somewhere on the screen
                  Menu name rectangle 512x384+1+1 +0 +0

                  # centered vertically around a menu item
                  AddToMenu foobar-menu
                   + "first item" Nop
                   + "special item" Popup "another menu" item +100 c
                   + "last item" Nop

                  # above the first menu item
                  AddToMenu foobar-menu
                   + "first item" Popup "another menu" item +0 -100m

              Note that you can put a sub menu far off the current menu so you could not reach it with the mouse
              without  leaving the menu.  If the pointer leaves the current menu in the general direction of the
              sub menu the menu stays up.

              The special-options:

              To create a tear off menu without opening the normal  menu,  add  the  option  TearOffImmediately.
              Normally  the menu opens in normal state for a split second before being torn off.  As tearing off
              places the menu like any other window, a position should be specified explicitly:

                  # Forbid fvwm to place the menu window
                  Style <name of menu> UsePPosition
                  # Menu at top left corner of screen
                  Menu Root 0p 0p TearOffImmediately

              The Animated and Mwm or Win menu styles may move a menu somewhere else on the screen.  If  you  do
              not  want this you can add Fixed as an option.  This might happen for example if you want the menu
              always in the top right corner of the screen.

              Where do you want a menu to appear when you click on its menu item? The default is  to  place  the
              title under the cursor, but if you want it where the position arguments say, use the SelectInPlace
              option.   If  you  want the pointer on the title of the menu, use SelectWarp too.  Note that these
              options apply only if the PopupAsRootMenu MenuStyle option is used.

              The pointer is warped to the title of a sub menu whenever the pointer would be on an item when the
              sub menu is popped up (fvwm menu style) or never warped to the title  at  all  (Mwm  or  Win  menu
              styles).   You  can  force  (forbid)  warping  whenever  the sub menu is opened with the WarpTitle
              (NoWarp) option.

              Note that the special-options do work with a normal menu that has no other position arguments.

       MenuStyle stylename [options]
              Sets a new menu style or changes a previously defined style.  The stylename is the style name;  if
              it  contains  spaces  or  tabs it has to be quoted.  The name "*" is reserved for the default menu
              style.  The default menu style is used for every menu-like object (e.g. the window created by  the
              WindowList  command)  that  had  not  be  assigned  a  style  using the ChangeMenuStyle.  See also
              DestroyMenuStyle.  When using monochrome color options are ignored.

              options is a comma separated list containing some of the keywords Fvwm / Mwm /  Win,  BorderWidth,
              Foreground,  Background,  Greyed,  HilightBack  /  !HilightBack,  HilightTitleBack,  ActiveFore  /
              !ActiveFore,  MenuColorset,  ActiveColorset,  GreyedColorset,  TitleColorset,   Hilight3DThick   /
              Hilight3DThin  /  Hilight3DOff,  Hilight3DThickness,  Animation  /  !Animation,  Font,  TitleFont,
              MenuFace, PopupDelay, PopupOffset, TitleWarp / !TitleWarp, TitleUnderlines0 /  TitleUnderlines1  /
              TitleUnderlines2,    SeparatorsLong   /   SeparatorsShort,   TrianglesSolid   /   TrianglesRelief,
              PopupImmediately   /   PopupDelayed,   PopdownImmediately   /   PopdownDelayed,   PopupActiveArea,
              DoubleClickTime,  SidePic, SideColor, PopupAsRootMenu / PopupAsSubmenu / PopupIgnore / PopupClose,
              RemoveSubmenus  /  HoldSubmenus,  SubmenusRight  /  SubmenusLeft,   SelectOnRelease,   ItemFormat,
              VerticalItemSpacing,  VerticalMargins, VerticalTitleSpacing, AutomaticHotkeys / !AutomaticHotkeys,
              UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate  /  !UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate,  MouseWheel,  ScrollOffPage  /
              !ScrollOffPage, TrianglesUseFore / !TrianglesUseFore.

              In the above list some options are listed as option pairs or triples with a '/' in between.  These
              options  exclude  each  other.   All  paired  options  can  be  negated  to have the effect of the
              counterpart option by prefixing ! to the option.

              Some options are now negated by prefixing ! to the option.  This is the  preferred  form  for  all
              such options.  The other negative forms are now deprecated and will be removed in the future.

              This   is   a   list  of  MenuStyle  deprecated  negative  options:  ActiveForeOff,  AnimationOff,
              AutomaticHotkeysOff, HilightBackOff, TitleWarpOff

              Fvwm, Mwm, Win reset all options to the style with the same name in former versions of fvwm.   The
              default  for  new menu styles is Fvwm style.  These options override all others except Foreground,
              Background, Greyed, HilightBack, ActiveFore and PopupDelay, so they should be  used  only  as  the
              first  option  specified  for  a  menu  style or to reset the style to defined behavior.  The same
              effect can be created by setting all the other options one by one.

              Mwm and Win style menus popup sub menus automatically.  Win menus indicate the current  menu  item
              by  changing  the  background  to dark.  Fvwm sub menus overlap the parent menu, Mwm and Win style
              menus never overlap the parent menu.

              Fvwm style is equivalent to !HilightBack, Hilight3DThin, !ActiveFore, !Animation, Font,  MenuFace,
              PopupOffset  0  67,  TitleWarp,  TitleUnderlines1, SeparatorsShort, TrianglesRelief, PopupDelayed,
              PopdownDelayed, PopupDelay 150, PopdownDelay  150,  PopupAsSubmenu,  HoldSubmenus,  SubmenusRight,
              BorderWidth 2, !AutomaticHotkeys, UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate, PopupActiveArea 75.

              Mwm  style is equivalent to !HilightBack, Hilight3DThick, !ActiveFore, !Animation, Font, MenuFace,
              PopupOffset   -3   100,    !TitleWarp,    TitleUnderlines2,    SeparatorsLong,    TrianglesRelief,
              PopupImmediately,  PopdownDelayed,  PopdownDelay 150, PopupAsSubmenu, HoldSubmenus, SubmenusRight,
              BorderWidth 2, UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate, !AutomaticHotkeys, PopupActiveArea 75.

              Win style is equivalent to HilightBack,  Hilight3DOff,  ActiveFore,  !Animation,  Font,  MenuFace,
              PopupOffset    -5    100,    !TitleWarp,    TitleUnderlines1,   SeparatorsShort,   TrianglesSolid,
              PopupImmediately, PopdownDelayed, PopdownDelay 150, PopupAsSubmenu, RemoveSubmenus, SubmenusRight,
              BorderWidth 2, UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate, !AutomaticHotkeys, PopupActiveArea 75.

              BorderWidth takes the thickness of the border around the menus in pixels.  It may be  zero  to  50
              pixels.  The default is 2.  Using an illegal value reverts the border width to the default.

              Foreground  and Background may have a color name as an argument.  This color is used for menu text
              or the menu's background.  You can omit the color name to  reset  these  colors  to  the  built-in
              default.

              Greyed  may have a color name as an argument.  This color is the one used to draw a menu-selection
              which is prohibited (or not recommended) by the Mwm hints which an application has specified.   If
              the  color  is  omitted  the  color of greyed menu entries is based on the background color of the
              menu.

              HilightBack and !HilightBack switch hilighting the background of the selected  menu  item  on  and
              off.   A  specific  background  color  may  be  used by providing the color name as an argument to
              HilightBack.  If you use this option without  an  argument  the  color  is  based  on  the  menu's
              background color.  The ActiveColorset option overrides the specified color.  If the colorset has a
              non solid background it is used for the hilighting.

              HilightTitleBack  switches  hilighting  the  background of menu titles on.  If a TitleColorset was
              used, the background colour is taken from there.  Otherwise the  color  is  based  on  the  menu's
              background color.  If the colorset has a non solid background it is used for the hilighting.

              ActiveFore  and !ActiveFore switch hilighting the foreground of the selected menu item on and off.
              A specific foreground color may be used by providing the color name as an argument to  ActiveFore.
              Omitting  the  color  turns  hilighting  on  when an ActiveColorset is used.  ActiveFore turns off
              hilighting the foreground completely.  The ActiveColorset option overrides the specified color.

              MenuColorset controls if a colorset is used instead of the  Foreground,  Background  and  MenuFace
              menu  styles.   If the MenuColorset keyword is followed by a number equal to zero or greater, this
              number is taken as the number of the colorset to use.  If the number is omitted, the  colorset  is
              switched  off and the regular menu styles are used again.  The foreground and background colors of
              the menu items are replaced by the colors from  the  colorset.   If  the  colorset  has  a  pixmap
              defined, this pixmap is used as the background of the menu.  Note that the MenuFace menu style has
              been optimized for memory consumption and may use less memory than the background from a colorset.
              The shape mask from the colorset is used to shape the menu.  Please refer to the Colorsets section
              for details about colorsets.

              ActiveColorset  works exactly like MenuColorset, but the foreground from the colorset replaces the
              color given with the ActiveFore menu style and the colorset's background color replaces the  color
              given  with  the  HilightBack  command  (to  turn  on  background  hilighting  you have to use the
              HilightBack menu style too).  If specified, the hilight and shadow colors from  the  colorset  are
              used too.  The pixmap and shape mask from the colorset are not used.  Hilighting the background or
              foreground can be turned off individually with the !ActiveFore or !HilightBack menu styles.

              GreyedColorset  works exactly like MenuColorset, but the foreground from the colorset replaces the
              color given with the Greyed menu style.  No other parts of the colorset are used.

              TitleColorset works exactly like MenuColorset, but is used only for menu titles.

              Hilight3DThick, Hilight3DThin and Hilight3DOff determine if the selected menu  item  is  hilighted
              with a 3D relief.  Thick reliefs are two pixels wide, thin reliefs are one pixel wide.

              Hilight3DThickness  takes  one  numeric  argument  that  may  be between -50 and +50 pixels.  With
              negative values the menu item gets a pressed in look.  The above three commands are equivalent  to
              a thickness of 2, 1 and 0.

              Animation  and  !Animation turn menu animation on or off.  When animation is on, sub menus that do
              not fit on the screen cause the parent menu to be shifted to the left so the sub menu can be seen.

              Font and TitleFont take a font name as an argument.  If a font by this name exists it is used  for
              the  text  of  all  menu  items.   If  it does not exist or if the name is left blank the built-in
              default is used.  If a TitleFont is given, it is used for all menu titles instead  of  the  normal
              font.

              MenuFace enforces a fancy background upon the menus.  You can use the same options for MenuFace as
              for  the ButtonStyle.  See description of ButtonStyle command and the Color Gradients sections for
              more information.  If you use MenuFace without arguments the style is reverted back to normal.

              Some examples of MenuFaces are:

                  MenuFace DGradient 128 2 lightgrey 50 blue 50 white
                  MenuFace TiledPixmap texture10.xpm
                  MenuFace HGradient 128 2 Red 40 Maroon 60 White
                  MenuFace Solid Maroon

              Note: The gradient styles H, V, B and D are optimized for high speed and low memory consumption in
              menus.  This is not the case for all the other gradient styles.  They may be slow and consume huge
              amounts of memory, so if you encounter performance problems with them you may be better off by not
              using them.  To improve performance you can try one or all of the following:

              Turn hilighting of the active menu item other than foreground color off:

                  MenuStyle <style> Hilight3DOff, !HilightBack
                  MenuStyle <style> ActiveFore <preferred color>

              Make sure sub menus do not overlap the parent menu.  This can prevent menus  being  redrawn  every
              time a sub menu pops up or down.

                  MenuStyle <style> PopupOffset 1 100

              Run  your X server with backing storage.  If your X Server is started with the -bs option, turn it
              off.  If not try the -wm and +bs options:

                  startx -- -wm +bs

              You may have to adapt this example to your system (e.g. if you use xinit to start X).

              PopupDelay requires one numeric argument.  This value is the delay in milliseconds  before  a  sub
              menu  is  popped  up when the pointer moves over a menu item that has a sub menu.  If the value is
              zero no automatic pop up is done.  If the argument is omitted the built-in default is used.   Note
              that  the  popup delay has no effect if the PopupImmediately option is used since sub menus pop up
              immediately then.

              PopupImmediately makes menu items with sub menus pop up it up as soon as the  pointer  enters  the
              item.   The  PopupDelay  option  is  ignored  then.   If  PopupDelayed  is  used fvwm looks at the
              PopupDelay option if or when this automatic popup happens.

              PopdownDelay works exactly like PopupDelay but determines the timeout of the PopupDelayed style.

              PopdownImmediately makes sub menus vanish as soon as the pointer  leaves  the  sub  menu  and  the
              correspondent  item in the parent menu.  With the opposite option PopdownDelayed the sub menu only
              pops down after the time specified with the  PopdownDelay  option.   This  comes  handy  when  the
              pointer often strays off the menu item when trying to move into the sub menu.  Whenever there is a
              conflict between the PopupImmediately, PopupDelayed, PopupDelay styles and the PopdownImmediately,
              PopdownDelayed,  PopdownDelay styles, the Popup...  styles win when using mouse navigation and the
              Popdown...  styles win when navigating with the keyboard.

              PopupOffset requires two integer arguments.   Both  values  affect  where  sub  menus  are  placed
              relative  to the parent menu.  If both values are zero, the left edge of the sub menu overlaps the
              left edge of the parent menu.  If the first value is non-zero the sub menu is  shifted  that  many
              pixels  to  the right (or left if negative).  If the second value is non-zero the menu is moved by
              that many percent of the parent menu's width to the right or left.

              PopupActiveArea requires an integer value between 51 and 100.  Normally, when the pointer is  over
              a  menu item with a sub menu and the pointer enters the area that starts at 75% of the menu width,
              the sub menu is shown immediately.  This percentage can be changed with PopupActiveArea.   Setting
              this  value  to  100  disables  this  kind  of  automatic popups altogether.  The default value is
              restored if no or an illegal value is given.

              TitleWarp and !TitleWarp affect if the pointer warps to the menu title when a sub menu  is  opened
              or  not.   Note that regardless of this setting the pointer is not warped if the menu does not pop
              up under the pointer.

              TitleUnderlines0, TitleUnderlines1 and TitleUnderlines2 specify how many lines are drawn  below  a
              menu title.

              SeparatorsLong  and  SeparatorsShort  set the length of menu separators.  Long separators run from
              the left edge all the way to the right edge.  Short separators leave a few pixels to the edges  of
              the menu.

              TrianglesSolid  and  TrianglesRelief affect how the small triangles for sub menus is drawn.  Solid
              triangles are filled with a color while relief triangles are hollow.

              DoubleClickTime requires one numeric argument.  This value is the time in milliseconds between two
              mouse clicks in a menu to be considered as a double click.  The default is 450  milliseconds.   If
              the argument is omitted the double click time is reset to this default.

              SidePic  takes the name of an image file as an argument.  The picture is drawn along the left side
              of the menu.  The SidePic option can be overridden by a menu specific side pixmap (see AddToMenu).
              If the file name is omitted an existing side pixmap is removed from the menu style.

              SideColor takes the name of an X11 color as an argument.  This color is used to color  the  column
              containing  the  side  picture  (see  above).   The  SideColor  option can be overridden by a menu
              specific side color (see AddToMenu).  If the color name  is  omitted  the  side  color  option  is
              switched off.

              PopupAsRootMenu,  PopupAsSubmenu, PopupIgnore and PopupClose change the behavior when you click on
              a menu item that opens a sub menu.  With PopupAsRootMenu the original menu is  closed  before  the
              sub  menu  appears,  with PopupAsSubmenu it is not, so you can navigate back into the parent menu.
              Furthermore, with PopupAsSubmenu the sub menu is held open (posted) regardless of where  you  move
              the  mouse.   Depending  on  your  menu  style this may simplify navigating through the menu.  Any
              keystroke while a menu is posted reverts the menu back to the normal  behavior.   With  PopupClose
              the  menu  is  closed when a sub menu item is activated, and the menu stays open if PopupIgnore is
              used (even if the menu was invoked with the Popup command).  PopupAsSubmenu is the default.

              RemoveSubmenus instructs fvwm to remove sub menu when you move back into the  parent  menu.   With
              HoldSubmenus the sub menu remains visible.  You probably want to use HoldSubmenus if you are using
              the PopupDelayed style.  RemoveSubmenus affects menu navigation with the keyboard.

              SelectOnRelease takes an optional key name as an argument.  If the given key is released in a menu
              using  this  style,  the  current  menu item is selected.  This is intended for Alt-Tab WindowList
              navigation.  The key name is a standard X11 key name as defined  in  /usr/include/X11/keysymdef.h,
              (without  the  XK_  prefix), or the keysym database /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XKeysymDB.  To disable this
              behavior, omit the key name.

              Note: Some X servers do not support KeyRelease events.  SelectOnRelease does not work  on  such  a
              machine.

              ItemFormat  takes  a  special string as its argument that determines the layout of the menu items.
              Think of the format string as if it were a menu item.  All you have to do is tell  fvwm  where  to
              place the different parts of the menu item (i.e. the labels, the triangle denoting a sub menu, the
              mini icons and the side pic) in the blank area.  The string consists of spaces, Tab characters and
              formatting  directives  beginning  with '%'.  Any illegal characters and formatting directives are
              silently ignored:

              %l, %c and %r
                  Insert the next item label.  Up to three labels can be used.  The item column is  left-aligned
                  (%l), centered (%c) or right-aligned (%r).

              %i
                  Inserts the mini icon.

              %> and %<
                  Insert the sub menu triangle pointing either to the right (%>) or to the left (%<).

              %|
                  The  first  %|  denotes the beginning of the area that is highlighted either with a background
                  color or a relief (or both).  The second %| marks the end of this area.  %| can be used up  to
                  twice  in  the  string.   If  you do not add one or both of them, fvwm sets the margins to the
                  margins of the whole item (not counting the side picture).

              %s
                  Places the side picture either at the beginning or the end of the menu.  This directive may be
                  used only once and only as the first or last in the format string.  If the %s is  not  at  the
                  beginning of the string, menus are not drawn properly.

              Space, Tab, %Space and %Tab
                  Add  gap of one space, or a tab, using the width of the menu font.  When using a tab, the size
                  of the gap can be one to 8 spaces since the tab position is a multiple of 8 from the  edge  of
                  the menu.  The whole string must be quoted if spaces or tabs are used.

              %p
                  Like Space and Tab %p inserts an empty area into the item, but with better control of its size
                  (see below).

              You can define an additional space before and after each of the objects like this:

                  %left.rightp

              This  means: if the object is defined in the menu (e.g. if it is %s and you use a side picture, or
              it is %l for the third column and there are items defined that actually have a third column), then
              add left pixels before the object and right pixels after it.  You may leave out the  left  or  the
              .right  parts  if  you  do  not  need  them.  All values up to the screen width are allowed.  Even
              negative values can be used with care.  The p may be replaced with any other formatting directives
              described above.

              Note: Only items defined in the format string are visible in the menus.  So if you do not put a %s
              in there you do not see a side picture, even if one is specified.

              Note: The SubmenusLeft style changes the default ItemFormat string, but if it was set manually  it
              is not modified.

              Note:  If any unformatted title of the menu is wider than the widest menu item, the spaces between
              the different parts of the menu items are enlarged to match the width of the title.  Leading  left
              aligned objects in the format string (%l, %i, %<, first %|) stick to the left edge of the menu and
              trailing  right aligned objects (%r, %i, %>, second %|) stick to the right edge.  The gaps between
              the remaining items are enlarged equally.

              Examples:

                  MenuStyle * ItemFormat "%.4s%.1|%.5i%.5l%.5l%.5r%.5i%2.3>%1|"

              Is the default string used by fvwm: (side picture + 4 pixels gap) (beginning of the hilighted area
              + 1 pixel gap) (mini icon + 5p) (first column left aligned + 5p) (second column left aligned + 5p)
              (third column right aligned + 5p) (second mini icon + 5p) (2p + sub menu triangle + 3p) (1p +  end
              of hilighted area).

                  MenuStyle * ItemFormat "%.1|%3.2<%5i%5l%5l%5r%5i%1|%4s"

              Is used by fvwm with the SubmenusLeft option below.

              VerticalItemSpacing and VerticalTitleSpacing control the vertical spacing of menu items and titles
              like  ItemFormat  controls the horizontal spacing.  Both take two numeric arguments that may range
              from -100 to +100.  The first is the gap in pixels above a normal menu item (or a menu title), the
              second is the gap in pixels below it.  Negative numbers do not make much sense and  may  screw  up
              the  menu  completely.  If no arguments are given or the given arguments are invalid, the built-in
              defaults are used: one pixel above the item or title and two below.

              VerticalMargins can be used to add some padding at the top and bottom  of  menus.   It  takes  two
              numeric  arguments  that  must  be positive integers (or zero).  If the number of arguments or its
              values are incorrect, fvwm defaults both to 0, which means no padding at all.  If the  values  are
              correct,  the  first  one  is  used  for the top margin, and the second one is used for the bottom
              margin.

              SubmenusLeft mirrors the menu layout and behavior.  Sub menus pop up to the  left,  the  sub  menu
              triangle is drawn left and the mini icon and side picture are drawn at the right side of the menu.
              The  default  is  SubmenusRight.   The position hints of a menu are also affected by this setting,
              i.e. position hints using item or menu as context rectangle and position hints using m offsets.

              AutomaticHotkeys and  !AutomaticHotkeys  control  the  menu's  ability  to  automatically  provide
              hot-keys  on the first character of each menu item's label.  This behavior is always overridden if
              an explicit hot-key is assigned in the AddToMenu command.

              UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate and !UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate controls  how  menu  items  are
              invoked when used with hotkeys.  By default, if a given menu entry only has one completeable match
              for a given hotkey, the action for that menu entry is invoked and the menu is closed.  This is due
              to  the  UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate  option.   However,  the  menu can be told to remain open,
              waiting for the user to invoke the selected item instead when there is only one matched item for a
              given hotkey, by using the !UniqueHotkeyActivatesImmediate option.

              MouseWheel controls the ability to scroll the menu using a mouse wheel.  It  takes  one  argument,
              that   can   be   one  of  ScrollsPointer,  ScrollsMenu,  ScrollsMenuBackwards  or  ActivatesItem.
              ScrollsPointer makes the mouse wheel scroll the  pointer  over  a  menu.   This  is  the  default.
              ScrollsMenu  and ScrollsMenuBackwards scroll the menu beneath the pointer.  ActivatesItem disables
              scrolling by mouse wheel and makes the use of a mouse wheel act as if the menu was clicked.  If no
              argument is supplied the default setting is restored.

              ScrollOffPage allows a menu to be scrolled out of  the  visible  area  if  MouseWheel  is  set  to
              ScrollsMenu  or ScrollsMenuBackwards.  This is the default.  The opposite, !ScrollOffPage disables
              this behaviour.

              TrianglesUseFore draws sub menu triangles with the foreground color of the menu colorset (normally
              drawn with the hilight color).  !TrianglesUseFore disables this behaviour.

              Examples:

                  MenuStyle * Mwm
                  MenuStyle * Foreground Black, Background gray40
                  MenuStyle * Greyed gray70, ActiveFore White
                  MenuStyle * !HilightBack, Hilight3DOff
                  MenuStyle * Font lucidasanstypewriter-14
                  MenuStyle * MenuFace DGradient 64 darkgray MidnightBlue

                  MenuStyle red Mwm
                  MenuStyle red Foreground Yellow
                  MenuStyle red Background Maroon
                  MenuStyle red Greyed Red, ActiveFore Red
                  MenuStyle red !HilightBack, Hilight3DOff
                  MenuStyle red Font lucidasanstypewriter-12
                  MenuStyle red MenuFace DGradient 64 Red Black

              Note that all style options could be placed on a single line for each style name.

       MenuStyle forecolor backcolor shadecolor font style [anim]
              This is the old syntax of the MenuStyle command.  It is obsolete and may be removed in the future.
              Please use the new syntax as described above.

              Sets the menu style.  When using monochrome the colors are ignored.  The  shadecolor  is  the  one
              used  to  draw a menu-selection which is prohibited (or not recommended) by the Mwm hints which an
              application has specified.  The style option is  either  Fvwm,  Mwm  or  Win,  which  changes  the
              appearance and operation of the menus.

              Mwm  and  Win style menus popup sub menus automatically.  Win menus indicate the current menu item
              by changing the background to black.  Fvwm sub menus overlap the parent menu, Mwm  and  Win  style
              menus never overlap the parent menu.

              When the anim option is given, sub menus that do not fit on the screen cause the parent menu to be
              shifted to the left so the sub menu can be seen.  See also SetAnimation command.

       Popup PopupName [position] [default-action]
              This  command  has  two  purposes: to bind a menu to a key or mouse button, and to bind a sub menu
              into a menu.  The formats for the two purposes differ slightly.  The position  arguments  are  the
              same as for Menu.  The command default-action is invoked if the user clicks a button to invoke the
              menu  and  releases  it immediately again (or hits the key rapidly twice if the menu is bound to a
              key).  If the default action is not specified, double clicking on the menu does nothing.  However,
              if the menu begins with a menu item (i.e. not with a title or a separator) and the default  action
              is  not  given, double clicking invokes the first item of the menu (but only if the pointer really
              was over the item).

              To bind a previously defined pop-up menu to a key or mouse button:

              The following example binds mouse buttons 2 and 3 to a pop-up called "Window Ops".  The menu  pops
              up  if  the  buttons  2  or  3  are  pressed  in the window frame, side-bar, or title-bar, with no
              modifiers (none of shift, control, or meta).

                  Mouse 2 FST N Popup "Window Ops"
                  Mouse 3 FST N Popup "Window Ops"

              Pop-ups can be bound to keys through the use of the Key command.  Pop-ups can be operated  without
              using the mouse by binding to keys and operating via the up arrow, down arrow, and enter keys.

              To bind a previously defined pop-up menu to another menu, for use as a sub menu:

              The  following  example  defines  a  sub  menu "Quit-Verify" and binds it into a main menu, called
              "RootMenu":

                  AddToMenu Quit-Verify
                   + "Really Quit Fvwm?" Title
                   + "Yes, Really Quit"  Quit
                   + "Restart Fvwm"      Restart
                   + "Restart Fvwm 1.xx" Restart fvwm1 -s
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "No, Don't Quit"    Nop

                  AddToMenu RootMenu "Root Menu" Title
                   + "Open XTerm Window" Popup NewWindowMenu
                   + "Login as Root"     Exec exec xterm -T Root -n Root -e su -
                   + "Login as Anyone"   Popup AnyoneMenu
                   + "Remote Hosts"      Popup HostMenu
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "X utilities"       Popup Xutils
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Fvwm Modules"      Popup Module-Popup
                   + "Fvwm Window Ops"   Popup Window-Ops
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Previous Focus"    Prev (AcceptsFocus) Focus
                   + "Next Focus"        Next (AcceptsFocus) Focus
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Refresh screen"    Refresh
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + "Reset X defaults"  Exec xrdb -load \
                                         $HOME/.Xdefaults
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + ""                  Nop
                   + Quit                Popup Quit-Verify

              Popup differs from Menu in that pop-ups do not stay up if  the  user  simply  clicks.   These  are
              popup-menus, which are a little hard on the wrist.  Menu menus stay up on a click action.  See the
              Menu  command  for  an explanation of the interactive behavior of menus.  A menu can be open up to
              ten times at once, so a menu may even use itself or any of its predecessors as a sub menu.

       TearMenuOff
              When assigned to a menu item, it inserts a tear off bar into the menu (a horizontal broken  line).
              Activating that item tears off the menu.  If the menu item has a label, it is shown instead of the
              broken line.  If used outside menus, this command does nothing.  Examples:

                  AddToMenu WindowMenu
                  + I "" TearMenuOff

                  AddToMenu RootMenu
                  + I "click here to tear me off" TearMenuOff

       Title
              Does nothing This is used to insert a title line in a popup or menu.

   Miscellaneous Commands
       BugOpts [option [bool]], ...
              This  command  controls  several  workarounds  for  bugs  in third party programs.  The individual
              options are separated by commas.  The optional argument bool is a boolean argument and controls if
              the bug workaround is enabled or not.  It can either be "True" or "False" to turn the option on or
              off, or "toggle" to switch is back and  forth.   If  bool  is  omitted,  the  default  setting  is
              restored.

              FlickeringMoveWorkaround  disables  ConfigureNotify events that are usually sent to an application
              while it is moved.  If some windows flicker annoyingly while being moved,  this  option  may  help
              you.  Note that if this problem occurs it is not an fvwm bug, it is a problem of the application.

              MixedVisualWorkaround  makes  fvwm  install the root colormap before it does some operations using
              the root window visuals.  This is only useful when the -visual option is used to  start  fvwm  and
              then only with some configurations of some servers (e.g. Exceed 6.0 with an 8 bit PseudoColor root
              and fvwm using a 24 bit TrueColor visual).

              The  ModalityIsEvil  option  controls  whether  Motif  applications have the ability to have modal
              dialogs (dialogs that force you to close them first before you can do anything else).  The default
              is to not allow applications to have modal dialogs.  Use this option with care.  Once this  option
              is turned on, you have to restart fvwm to turn it off.

              RaiseOverNativeWindows makes fvwm try to raise the windows it manages over native windows of the X
              server's  host system.  This is needed for some X servers running under Windows, Windows NT or Mac
              OS X.  Fvwm tries to detect if it is running under such an  X  server  and  initializes  the  flag
              accordingly.

              RaiseOverUnmanaged  makes fvwm try to raise the windows it manages over override_redirect windows.
              This is used to cope with ill-mannered applications that use  long-lived  windows  of  this  sort,
              contrary to ICCCM conventions.  It is useful with the Unmanaged style option too.

              FlickeringQtDialogsWorkaround  suppresses  flickering  of  the focused window in some modules when
              using KDE or QT applications with application modal dialog windows.  By  default  this  option  is
              turned  on.   This  option  may  be  visually  disturbing for other applications using windows not
              managed by fvwm.  Since these applications are rare it is most likely safe to leave this option at
              its default.

              QtDragnDropWorkaround suppresses the forwarding of unknown  ClientEvent  messages  to  windows  --
              usually  this  is  harmless,  but  Qt  has  problems  handling  unrecognised ClientEvent messages.
              Enabling this option might therefore help for Qt applications using DragnDrop.  This option is off
              by default.

              EWMHIconicStateWorkaround is needed by EWMH compliant pagers or taskbars which  represent  windows
              which  are  on  a different desktops as iconified.  These pagers and taskbars use a version of the
              EWMH specification before version 1.2 (the current KDE 2 & 3 versions).  These pagers and taskbars
              use the IconicState WM_STATE state to determine if  an  application  is  iconified.   This  state,
              according  to  the ICCCM, does not imply that a window is iconified (in the usual sense).  Turning
              on this option forces fvwm to establish an equivalence between the IconicState WM_STATE state  and
              the  iconified  window.   This  violates  ICCCM  compliance but should not cause big problems.  By
              default this option is off.

              With the DisplayNewWindowNames enabled, fvwm prints the name, icon name (if  available),  resource
              and  class  of new windows to the console.  This can help in finding the correct strings to use in
              the Style command.

              When the ExplainWindowPlacement option is enabled, fvwm prints a message to the console whenever a
              new window is placed or one of the commands PlaceAgain, Recapture or RecaptureWindow is used.  The
              message explains on which desk, page, Xinerama screen and position it was placed  and  why.   This
              option can be used to figure out why a specific window does not appear where you think it should.

              The  DebugCRMotionMethod  option  enables  some  debugging  code  in the ConfigureRequest handling
              routines of fvwm.  It is not helpful for the user, but if you report a bug to the fvwm team we may
              ask you to enable this option.

              The TransliterateUtf8 option enables transliteration during conversions from  utf-8  strings.   By
              default  fvwm  will  not  transliterate during conversion, but will fall back to alternate strings
              provided by the clients if conversion from utf-8 fails due to  characters  which  have  no  direct
              correspondence  in  the  target  charecter  set.   Some  clients  however neglect to set non utf-8
              properties correctly in which case this option may help.

       BusyCursor [Option bool], ...
              This command controls the cursor  during  the  execution  of  certain  commands.   Option  can  be
              DynamicMenu, ModuleSynchronous, Read, Wait or *.  An option must be followed by a boolean argument
              bool.   You  can  use commas to separate individual options.  If you set an option to "True", then
              when the corresponding command is run, fvwm displays  the  cursor  of  the  WAIT  context  of  the
              CursorStyle command.  "False" forces to not display the cursor.  The default is:

                  BusyCursor DynamicMenu False, ModuleSynchronous False, \
                    Read False, Wait False

              The * option refers to all available options.

              The Read option controls the PipeRead command.

              The  DynamicMenu  option  affects the DynamicPopupAction and MissingSubmenuFunction options of the
              AddToMenu command.  If this option is set to "False", then the busy cursor is not displayed during
              a dynamic menu command even if this command is a Read or PipeRead command and the Read  option  is
              set to "True".

              The  ModuleSynchronous  option  affects  the  ModuleSynchronous command.  If this option is set to
              "False", then the busy cursor  is  not  displayed  while  fvwm  waits  for  a  module  started  by
              ModuleSynchronous to complete its startup.

              The  Wait option affects only the root cursor.  During a wait pause the root cursor is replaced by
              the busy cursor and fvwm is still fully functional  (you  can  escape  from  the  pause,  see  the
              EscapeFunc  command).   If  you  want  to  use  this option and if you do not use the default root
              cursor, you must set your root cursor with the CursorStyle command.

       ClickTime [delay]
              Specifies the maximum delay in milliseconds between a button press and a button  release  for  the
              Function  command  to  consider  the action a mouse click.  The default delay is 150 milliseconds.
              Omitting the delay value resets the ClickTime to the default.

              ClickTime also specifies the delay between two clicks to be interpreted as a double-click.

       ColorLimit limit
              This command is obsolete.  See the --color-limit option to fvwm.

       ColormapFocus FollowsMouse | FollowsFocus
              By default, fvwm installs the colormap of the window that the cursor is in.  If you use

                  ColormapFocus FollowsFocus

              then the installed colormap is the one for the window that currently has the keyboard focus.

       CursorStyle context [num | name | None | Tiny | file [x y] [fg bg]]
              Defines a new cursor for the specified context.  Note that this command can not control the shapes
              an applications uses, for example, to indicate that it is busy.  The various contexts are:

              POSITION (top_left_corner)
                  used when initially placing windows

              TITLE (top_left_arrow)
                  used in a window title-bar

              DEFAULT (top_left_arrow)
                  used in windows that do not set their cursor

              SYS (hand2)
                  used in one of the title-bar buttons

              MOVE (fleur)
                  used when moving or resizing windows

              RESIZE (sizing)
                  used when moving or resizing windows

              WAIT (watch)
                  used during certain fvwm commands (see BusyCursor for details)

              MENU (top_left_arrow)
                  used in menus

              SELECT (crosshair)
                  used when the user is required to select a window

              DESTROY (pirate)
                  used for Destroy, Close, and Delete commands

              TOP (top_side)
                  used in the top side-bar of a window

              RIGHT (right_side)
                  used in the right side-bar of a window

              BOTTOM (bottom_side)
                  used in the bottom side-bar of a window

              LEFT (left_side)
                  used in the left side-bar of a window

              TOP_LEFT (top_left_corner)
                  used in the top left corner of a window

              TOP_RIGHT (top_right_corner)
                  used in the top right corner of a window

              BOTTOM_LEFT (bottom_left_corner)
                  used in the bottom left corner of a window

              BOTTOM_RIGHT (bottom_right_corner)
                  used in the bottom right corner of a window

              TOP_EDGE (top_side)
                  used at the top edge of the screen

              RIGHT_EDGE (right_side)
                  used at the right edge of the screen

              BOTTOM_EDGE (bottom_side)
                  used at the bottom edge of the screen

              LEFT_EDGE (left_side)
                  used at the left edge of the screen

              ROOT (left_ptr)
                  used as the root cursor

              STROKE (plus)
                  used during a StrokeFunc command.

              The defaults are shown in parentheses above.  If you ever want to restore the default cursor for a
              specific context you can omit the second argument.

              The second argument is either the numeric value of the cursor  as  defined  in  the  include  file
              X11/cursorfont.h  or  its  name (without the XC_ prefix).  Alternatively, the xpm file name may be
              specified.  The name can also be None (no cursor) or Tiny (a single pixel as the cursor).

                  # make the kill cursor be XC_gumby (both forms work):
                  CursorStyle DESTROY 56
                  CursorStyle DESTROY gumby

              Alternatively, the cursor can be loaded from an (XPM, PNG or SVG) image file.  If fvwm is compiled
              with Xcursor support, full ARGB is used, and  (possibly  animated)  cursor  files  made  with  the
              xcursorgen program can be loaded.  Otherwise the cursor is converted to monochrome.

              The  optional x and y arguments (following a file argument) specifies the hot-spot coordinate with
              0 0 as the top left corner of the image.  Coordinates within the  image  boundary  are  valid  and
              overrides  any hot-spot defined in the (XPM/Xcursor) image file.  An invalid or undefined hot-spot
              is placed in the center of the image.

                  CursorStyle ROOT cursor_image.png 0 0

              The optional fg and bg arguments specify the foreground and  background  colors  for  the  cursor,
              defaulting  to  black  and  white (reverse video compared to the actual bitmap).  These colors are
              only used with monochrome cursors.  Otherwise they are silently ignored.

                  CursorStyle ROOT nice_arrow.xpm yellow black

       DefaultColors [foreground] [background]
              DefaultColors sets the default foreground and background  colors  used  in  miscellaneous  windows
              created  by  fvwm, for example in the geometry feedback windows during a move or resize operation.
              If you do not want to change one color or the other, use - as its color name.  To  revert  to  the
              built-in  default  colors  omit  both  color  names.  Note that the default colors are not used in
              menus, window titles or icon titles.

       DefaultColorset [num]
              DefaultColorset sets the colorset used by the windows controlled by the DefaultColors command.  To
              revert back to the DefaultColors colors use

                  DefaultColorset -1

              or any variant of the DefaultColors command.

       DefaultFont [fontname]
              DefaultFont sets the default font to font fontname.  The default font is used by fvwm whenever  no
              other  font  has  been  specified.   To  reset  the default font to the built-in default, omit the
              argument.  The default font is used for menus, window titles, icon titles as well as the  geometry
              feedback  windows  during  a move or resize operation.  To override the default font in a specific
              context, use the Style * Font, Style * IconFont, or MenuStyle commands.

       DefaultIcon filename
              Sets the default icon which is used if a window has neither an client-supplied icon  nor  an  icon
              supplied via the Icon option of the Style command.

       DefaultLayers bottom put top
              Changes  the  layers  that  are  used  for  the StaysOnBottom, StaysPut, StaysOnTop Style options.
              Initially, the layers 2, 4 and 6 are used.

       Deschedule [command_id]
              Removes all commands that were scheduled with the id command_id with the Schedule command from the
              list of commands to be executed unless they were already executed.  If the command_id is  omitted,
              the value of the variable $[schedule.last] is used as the id.

       Emulate Fvwm | Mwm | Win
              This command is a catch all for how miscellaneous things are done by fvwm.  Right now this command
              affects  where  the  move/resize  feedback window appears and how window placement is aborted.  To
              have more Mwm- or Win-like behavior you can call Emulate with Mwm or Win as  its  argument.   With
              Mwm  resize  and  move feedback windows are in the center of the screen, instead of the upper left
              corner.  This also affects how manual placement is aborted.  See the ManualPlacement description.

       EscapeFunc
              By default the key sequence Ctrl-Alt-Escape allows for escaping from  a  Wait  pause  and  from  a
              locked  ModuleSynchronous  command.   The  EscapeFunc command used with the Key command allows for
              configuring this key sequence.  An example:

                  Key Escape A MC -
                  Key Escape A  S EscapeFunc

              replaces the Ctrl-Alt-Escape key  sequence  with  Shift-Escape  for  aborting  a  Wait  pause  and
              ModuleSynchronous command.  EscapeFunc used outside the Key command does nothing.

       FakeClick [command value] ...
              This  command  is  mainly intended for debugging fvwm and no guarantees are made that it works for
              you.  FakeClick can simulate mouse button press and release events and pass them to  fvwm  or  the
              applications.   The parameters are a list of commands which consist of pairs of command tokens and
              integer values, The press and release commands are followed by the appropriate mouse button number
              and generate a button press or release event on the window below the pointer.  The  wait  commands
              pauses  fvwm  for  the  given number of milliseconds.  The modifiers command simulates pressing or
              releasing modifier keys.  The values 1 to 5 are mapped to Mod1 to Mod5 while 6, 7 and 8 are mapped
              to Shift , Lock and Control The modifier is set for any  further  button  events.   To  release  a
              modifier key, use the corresponding negative number.  The depth command determines to which window
              the  button  events  are sent.  With a depth of 1, all events go to the root window, regardless of
              the pointer's position.  With 2, the event is passed to the top level  window  under  the  pointer
              which  is usually the frame window.  With 3, events go to the client window.  Higher numbers go to
              successive sub windows.  Zero (0) goes to the smallest window that  contains  the  pointer.   Note
              that events propagate upward.

                  FakeClick depth 2 press 1 wait 250 release 1

              This  simulates  a  click  with  button  1  in  the  parent  window  (depth 2) with a delay of 250
              milliseconds between the press and the release.  Note: all command names can be  abbreviated  with
              their first letter.

       FakeKeypress [command value] ...
              This  command  is  mainly intended for debugging fvwm and no guarantees are made that it works for
              you.  FakeKeypress  can  simulate  key  press  and  release  events  and  pass  them  to  fvwm  or
              applications.   The parameters are a list of commands which consist of pairs of command tokens and
              values.  The press and release commands are followed by a key name.  The key name  is  a  standard
              X11  key  name as defined in /usr/include/X11/keysymdef.h, (without the XK_ prefix), or the keysym
              database /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XKeysymDB.  The wait, modifiers and depth commands  are  the  same  as
              those used by FakeClick.

              Save all GVim sessions with: "Esc:w\n"

                  All (gvim) FakeKeypress press Escape \
                                          press colon \
                                          press w \
                                          press Return

              Save & exit all GVim sessions with: "Esc:wq\n"

                  All (gvim) FakeKeypress press Escape \
                                          press colon \
                                          press w \
                                          press q \
                                          press Return

              Send A to a specific window:

                  WindowId 0x3800002 FakeKeypress press A

              Note: all command names can be abbreviated with their first letter.

       GlobalOpts [options]
              This  command is obsolete.  Please replace the global options in your configuration file according
              to the following table:

                  GlobalOpts WindowShadeShrinks
                    -->
                  Style * WindowShadeShrinks

                  GlobalOpts WindowShadeScrolls
                    -->
                  Style * WindowShadeScrolls

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsReallySmart
                    -->
                  Style * MinOverlapPlacement

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsNormal
                    -->
                  Style * TileCascadePlacement

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusDoesntPassClick
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusPassesClickOff

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusPassesClick
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusPassesClick

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusDoesntRaise
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusRaisesOff

                  GlobalOpts ClickToFocusRaises
                    -->
                  Style * ClickToFocusRaises

                  GlobalOpts MouseFocusClickDoesntRaise
                    -->
                  Style * MouseFocusClickRaisesOff

                  GlobalOpts MouseFocusClickRaises
                    -->
                  Style * MouseFocusClickRaises

                  GlobalOpts NoStipledTitles
                    -->
                  Style * !StippledTitle

                  GlobalOpts StipledTitles
                    -->
                  Style * StippledTitle

                  GlobalOpts CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts ActivePlacementHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts ActivePlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage

                  GlobalOpts RaiseOverNativeWindows
                    -->
                  BugOpts RaiseOverNativeWindows on

                  GlobalOpts IgnoreNativeWindows
                    -->
                  BugOpts RaiseOverNativeWindows off

       HilightColor textcolor backgroundcolor
              This command is obsoleted by the Style options HilightFore and HilightBack.  Please use

                  Style * HilightFore textcolor, HilightBack backgroundcolor

              instead.

       HilightColorset [num]
              This command is obsoleted by the Style option HilightColorset.  Please use

                  Style * HilightColorset num

              instead.

       IconFont [fontname]
              This command is obsoleted by the Style option IconFont.  Please use

                  Style * IconFont fontname

              instead.

       IconPath path
              This command is obsolete.  Please use ImagePath instead.

       ImagePath path
              Specifies a colon separated list of directories in which to search for images (both monochrome and
              pixmap).  To find an image given by a relative pathname, fvwm looks into each directory listed  in
              turn, and uses the first file found.

              If a directory is given in the form "/some/dir;.ext", this means all images in this directory have
              the  extension  ".ext"  that  should be forced.  The original image name (that may contain another
              extension or no extension at all) is not probed, instead ".ext" is added or replaces the  original
              extension.   This  is useful, for example, if a user has some image directories with ".xpm" images
              and other image directories with the same names, but ".png" images.

              The path may contain environment variables such as $HOME (or ${HOME}).  Further, a '+' in the path
              is expanded to the previous value of the path,  allowing  appending  or  prepending  to  the  path
              easily.

              For example:

                  ImagePath $HOME/icons:+:/usr/include/X11/bitmaps

              Note: if the FvwmM4 module is used to parse your config files, then m4 may want to mangle the word
              "include" which frequently shows up in the ImagePath command.  To fix this one may add

                  undefine(`include')

              prior to the ImagePath command, or better: use the -m4-prefix option to force all m4 directives to
              have a prefix of "m4_" (see the FvwmM4 man page).

       LocalePath path
              Specifies  a  colon separated list of "locale path" in which to search for string translations.  A
              locale path is constituted by a directory path and a text domain separated by a  semicolon  (';').
              As an example the default locale path is:

                  /install_prefix/share/locale;fvwm

              where install_prefix is the fvwm installation directory.  With such a locale path translations are
              searched for in

                  /install_prefix/share/locale/lang/LC_MESSAGES/fvwm.mo

              where lang depends on the locale.  If no directory is given the default directory path is assumed.
              If  no  text  domain  is  given,  fvwm  is  assumed.   Without argument the default locale path is
              restored.

              As for the ImagePath command, path may contain environment  variables  and  a  '+'  to  append  or
              prepend the locale path easily.

              For example, the fvwm-themes package uses

                  LocalePath ";fvwm-themes:+"

              to add locale catalogs.

              The  default  fvwm  catalog  contains  a  few strings used by the fvwm executable itself (Desk and
              Geometry) and strings used in some default configuration files and  FvwmForm  configuration.   You
              can  take  a look at the po/ subdirectory of the fvwm source to get the list of the strings with a
              possible translation in various languages.  At present, very few languages are supported.

              The main use of locale catalogs is via the "$[gt.string]" parameter:

                  DestroyMenu MenuFvwmWindowOps
                  AddToMenu   MenuFvwmWindowOps "$[gt.Window Ops]" Title
                  + "$[gt.&Move]"              Move
                  + "$[gt.&Resize]"            Resize
                  + "$[gt.R&aise]"             Raise
                  + "$[gt.&Lower]"             Lower
                  + "$[gt.(De)&Iconify]"       Iconify
                  + "$[gt.(Un)&Stick]"         Stick
                  + "$[gt.(Un)Ma&ximize]"      Maximize
                  + "" Nop
                  + "$[gt.&Close]"             Close
                  + "$[gt.&Destroy]"           Destroy

              gives a menu in the locale languages if translations are available.

              Note that the FvwmScript module has a set of special instructions for string translation.   It  is
              out  of the scope of this discussion to explain how to build locale catalogs.  Please refer to the
              GNU gettext documentation.

       PixmapPath path
              This command is obsolete.  Please use ImagePath instead.

       PrintInfo subject [verbose]
              Print information on subject on stderr.  An optional integer argument verbose defines the level of
              information which is given.  The current valid subjects are:

              Colors which prints information about the colors used by fvwm.  This useful on screens  which  can
              only  display 256 (or less) colors at once.  If verbose is one or greater the palette used by fvwm
              is printed.  If you have a limited color palette, and you run out of colors, this command might be
              helpful.

              ImageCache which prints information about the images loaded by fvwm.  If verbose is one or greater
              all images in the cache will be listed together with their respective reuse.

              Locale which prints information on your locale and the fonts that fvwm used.  verbose can be 1  or
              2.

              nls which prints information on the locale catalogs that fvwm used

              style which prints information on fvwm styles.  verbose can be 1.

              bindings  which  prints  information on all the bindings fvwm has: key, mouse and stroke bindings.
              verbose has no effect with this option.

              infostore which prints information on all entries in the infostore, listing the key and its value.
              verbose has no effect with this option.

       Repeat
              When the Repeat command is invoked, the last command that was executed by fvwm is executed  again.
              This  happens  regardless  of  whether  it  was triggered by user interaction, a module or by an X
              event.  Commands that are executed from a function defined with the  Function  command,  from  the
              Read  or PipeRead commands or by a menu are not repeated.  Instead, the function, menu or the Read
              or PipeRead command is executed again.

       Schedule [Periodic] delay_ms [command_id] command
              The command is executed after about delay_ms milliseconds.  This may  be  useful  in  some  tricky
              setups.   The command is executed in the same context window as the Schedule command.  An optional
              integer argument command_id may be given in decimal, hexadecimal or octal format.  This id can  be
              used  with the Deschedule command to remove the scheduled command before it is executed.  If no id
              is given, fvwm uses negative id numbers, starting with -1 and decreasing by one with each  use  of
              the  Schedule command.  Note that the Schedule command and its arguments undergo the usual command
              line expansion, and, when command is finally executed, it is expanded again.  It may therefore  be
              necessary to quote the parts of the command that must not be expanded twice.

              Note: A window's id as it is returned with $[w.id] can be used as the command_id.  Example:

                  Current Schedule 1000 $[w.id] WindowShade

              The  Schedule command also supports the optional keyword Periodic which indicates that the command
              should be executed every delay_ms.  Example:

                  Schedule Periodic 10000 PipeRead '[ -N "$MAIL" ] && echo \
                       Echo You have mail'

              Use the Deschedule command to stop periodic commands.

       State state [bool]
              Sets, clears or toggles one of the 32 user defined states which are associated with  each  window.
              The  state  is a number ranging from 0 to 31.  The states have no meaning in fvwm, but they can be
              checked in conditional commands like Next with the State condition.  The optional argument bool is
              a boolean argument.  "True" sets the  given  state,  while  "False"  clears  it.   Using  "toggle"
              switches to the opposite state.  If the bool argument is not given, the state is toggled.

       WindowFont [fontname]
              This command is obsoleted by the Style option Font.  Please use

                  Style * Font fontname

              instead.

       WindowList [(conditions)] [position] [options] [double-click-action]
              Generates  a  pop-up  menu (and pops it up) in which the title and geometry of each of the windows
              currently on the desktop are shown.

              The format of the geometry part is: desk(layer): x-geometry sticky, where desk and layer  are  the
              corresponding  numbers  and  sticky is empty or a capital S.  The geometry of iconified windows is
              shown in parentheses.  Selecting an item from the window list pop-up menu causes  the  interpreted
              function  "WindowListFunc"  to  be  run  with  the  window id of that window passed in as $0.  The
              default "WindowListFunc" looks like this:

                  AddToFunc WindowListFunc
                  + I Iconify off
                  + I FlipFocus
                  + I Raise
                  + I WarpToWindow 5p 5p

              You can destroy the built-in "WindowListFunc" and create your own if these defaults  do  not  suit
              you.

              The  window  list  menu uses the "WindowList" menu style if it is defined (see MenuStyle command).
              Otherwise the default menu style is used.  To switch back to the default  menu  style,  issue  the
              command

                  DestroyMenuStyle WindowList

              Example:

                  MenuStyle WindowList SelectOnRelease Meta_L

              The  conditions  can be used to exclude certain windows from the window list.  Please refer to the
              Current command for details.  Only windows that match the given conditions are  displayed  in  the
              window  list.   The options below work vice versa: windows that would otherwise not be included in
              the window list can be selected with them.  The conditions always override the options.

              The position arguments are the same as for Menu.  The command double-click-action  is  invoked  if
              the user double-clicks (or hits the key rapidly twice if the menu is bound to a key) when bringing
              the window list.  The double-click-action must be quoted if it consists of more than one word.

              The  double-click-action is useful to define a default window if you have bound the window list to
              a key (or button) like this:

                  # Here we call an existing function, but
                  # it may be different.  See the default
                  # WindowListFunc definition earlier in this
                  # man page.
                  AddToFunc SwitchToWindow
                  + I WindowListFunc

                  Key Tab A M WindowList "Prev SwitchToWindow"

              Hitting Alt-Tab once it brings up the window list, if you  hit  it  twice  the  focus  is  flipped
              between  the current and the last focused window.  With the proper SelectOnRelease menu style (see
              example above) a window is selected as soon as you release the Alt key.

              The options passed to WindowList are separated by commas  and  can  be  Geometry  /  NoGeometry  /
              NoGeometryWithInfo, NoDeskNum, NoLayer, NoNumInDeskTitle, NoCurrentDeskTitle, MaxLabelWidth width,
              TitleForAllDesks,  Function  funcname,  Desk  desknum,  CurrentDesk,  NoIcons / Icons / OnlyIcons,
              NoNormal  /  Normal  /  OnlyNormal,  NoSticky  /  Sticky  /  OnlySticky,   NoStickyAcrossPages   /
              StickyAcrossPages    /    OnlyStickyAcrossPages,   NoStickyAcrossDesks   /   StickyAcrossDesks   /
              OnlyStickyAcrossDesks, NoOnTop / OnTop / OnlyOnTop, NoOnBottom / OnBottom / OnlyOnBottom, Layer  m
              [n],   UseSkipList   /   OnlySkipList,  NoDeskSort,  ReverseOrder,  CurrentAtEnd,  IconifiedAtEnd,
              UseIconName, Alphabetic / NotAlphabetic, SortByResource, SortByClass, NoHotkeys, SelectOnRelease.

              (Note - normal means not iconic, sticky, or on top)

              With the SortByResource option windows are alphabetically sorted first by resource class, then  by
              resource  name  and  then by window name (or icon name if UseIconName is specified).  ReverseOrder
              also works in the expected manner.

              With the SortByClass option windows are sorted just like with  SortByResource,  but  the  resource
              name is not taken into account, only the resource class.

              The  SelectOnRelease  option  works  exactly  like  the  MenuStyle  option with the same name, but
              overrides the option given in a menu style.  By default, this option is set to the left  Alt  key.
              To switch it off, use SelectOnRelease without a key name.

              If  you  pass  in  a  function  via Function funcname, it is called within a window context of the
              selected window:

                  AddToFunc IFunc I Iconify toggle
                  WindowList Function IFunc, NoSticky, CurrentDesk, NoIcons

              If you use the Layer m [n] option, only windows in layers  between  m  and  n  are  displayed.   n
              defaults to m.  With the ReverseOrder option the order of the windows in the list is reversed.

              With  the  CurrentAtEnd option the currently focused window (if any) is shown at the bottom of the
              list.  This is mostly intended for simulating the Alt-Tab behavior in another GUI.

              IconifiedAtEnd makes iconified windows be moved to the end of the list.  This is also from another
              GUI.

              The NoGeometry option causes fvwm to not display the geometries as well as  the  separators  which
              indicate  the different desktops.  NoGeometryWithInfo removes the geometries, but keep the desktop
              information and indicates iconic windows.  NoDeskNum causes fvwm to not display the desktop number
              in the geometry or before the window title with the NoGeometryWithInfo  option.   NoNumInDeskTitle
              is  only  useful if a desktop name is defined with the DesktopName command.  It causes fvwm to not
              display the desktop number before the desktop name.  By default, the WindowList menu have a  title
              which  indicates  the  current  desk  or  the selected desktop if the Desk condition is used.  The
              NoCurrentDeskTitle option removes this title.  TitleForAllDesks causes fvwm to add  a  menu  title
              with the desk name and/or number before each group of windows on the same desk.  With NoLayer, the
              layer  of  the  window  is  not  displayed.   The options ShowPage, ShowPageX and ShowPageY enable
              displaying the page of the window rounded multiples of the display  size.   With  ShowScreen,  the
              window's Xinerama screen number is displayed.

              The  MaxLabelWidth  option  takes the number of characters to print as its argument.  No more than
              that many characters of the window name are visible.

              If you wanted to use the WindowList as an icon manager, you could invoke the following:

                  WindowList OnlyIcons, Sticky, OnTop, Geometry

              (Note - the Only options essentially wipe out all other ones... but the OnlyListSkip option  which
              just causes WindowList to only consider the windows with WindowListSkip style.)

       XSync
              When  XSync is called, the X function with the same name is used to send all pending X requests to
              the server.  This command is intended for debugging only.

       XSynchronize [bool]
              The XSynchronize command controls whether X requests are sent to the X server immediately or  not.
              Normally, requests are sent in larger batches to save unnecessary communication.  To send requests
              immediately,  use  "True"  as  the argument, to disable this use "False" or to toggle between both
              methods use "Toggle" or omit the bool argument.   Fvwm  defaults  to  synchronized  requests  when
              started with the --debug option.  This command is intended for debugging only.

       +
              Used  to  continue  adding  to the last specified decor, function or menu.  See the discussion for
              AddToDecor, AddToFunc, and AddToMenu.

   Window Movement and Placement
       AnimatedMove x y [Warp]
              Move a window in an animated fashion.  Similar to Move command.  The options are the same,  except
              they  are  required,  since it doesn't make sense to have a user move the window interactively and
              animatedly.  If the optional argument Warp is specified the pointer is warped with the window.

       HideGeometryWindow [Never | Move | Resize]
              Hides the position or size window that is  usually  shown  when  a  window  is  moved  or  resized
              interactively.   To  switch it off only for move or resize operations the optional parameters Move
              and Resize can be used respectively.  To switch both on again use the Never option.

       Layer [arg1 arg2] | [default]
              Puts the current window in a new layer.  If arg1 is non zero then the next layer  is  the  current
              layer number plus arg1.  If arg1 is zero then the new layer is arg2.

              As  a  special case, default puts the window in its default layer, i.e. the layer it was initially
              in.  The same happens if no or invalid arguments are specified.

       Lower
              Allows the user to lower a window.  Note that this lowers a window only in its layer.  To bring  a
              window to the absolute bottom, use

                  AddToFunc lower-to-bottom
                   + I Layer 0 0
                   + I Lower

       Move [[screen screen] [w | m]x[p | w] ... [w | m]y[p | w] ... [Warp]] | [pointer] | [ewmhiwa]
              Allows  the  user to move a window.  If called from somewhere in a window or its border, then that
              window is moved.  If called from the root window then the user is allowed  to  select  the  target
              window.  By default, the EWMH working area is honoured.

              If  the  literal  option  screen  followed  by a screen argument is specified, the coordinates are
              interpreted as relative to the given screen.  The width and height of the screen are used for  the
              calculations  instead of the display dimensions.  The screen as interpreted as in the MoveToScreen
              command.  If the optional argument Warp is specified the pointer is warped with  the  window.   If
              the  single  argument  pointer is given, the top left corner of the window is moved to the pointer
              position before starting the operation; this is mainly intended for internal use by  modules  like
              FvwmPager.   If  the  optional argument ewmhiwa is given, then the window position will ignore the
              working area (such as ignoring any values set via EwmhBaseStruts).

              The operation can be aborted with Escape or any mouse button not set  to  place  the  window.   By
              default  mouse button 2 is set to cancel the move operation.  To change this you may use the Mouse
              command with special context 'P' for Placement.

              The window condition PlacedByButton can be used to check if a specific button was pressed to place
              the window (see Current command).

              If the optional arguments x and y are provided, then the window is moved immediately without  user
              interaction.   Each argument can specify an absolute or relative position from either the left/top
              or right/bottom of the screen.  By default, the numeric value given is interpreted as a percentage
              of the screen width/height, but a trailing 'p' changes the interpretation to mean pixels, while  a
              trailing 'w' means precent of the window width/height.  To move the window relative to its current
              position,  add the 'w' (for "window") prefix before the x and/or y value.  To move the window to a
              position relative to the current location of the pointer, add the 'm' (for  "mouse")  prefix.   To
              leave either coordinate unchanged, "keep" can be specified in place of x or y.

              For advanced uses, the arguments x and y can be used multiple times, but without the prefix 'm' or
              'w'.  (See complex examples below).

              Simple Examples:

                  # Interactive move
                  Mouse 1 T A Move
                  # Move window to top left is at (10%,10%)
                  Mouse 2 T A Move 10 10
                  # Move top left to (10pixels,10pixels)
                  Mouse 3 T A Move 10p 10p

              More  complex  examples  (these  can  be bound as actions to keystrokes, etc.; only the command is
              shown, though):

                  # Move window so bottom right is at bottom
                  # right of screen
                  Move -0 -0

                  # Move window so top left corner is 10 pixels
                  # off the top left screen edge
                  Move +-10 +-10

                  # Move window 5% to the right, and to the
                  # middle vertically
                  Move w+5 50

                  # Move window up 10 pixels, and so left edge
                  # is at x=40 pixels
                  Move 40p w-10p

                  # Move window to the mouse pointer location
                  Move m+0 m+0

                  # Move window to center of screen (50% of screen
                  # poition minus 50% of widow size).
                  Move 50-50w 50-50w

              Note: In order to obtain moving windows which do not snap to screen, with interactive  move,  hold
              down Alt whilst moving the window to disable snap attraction if it's defined.

              See also the AnimatedMove command.

       MoveToDesk [prev | arg1 [arg2] [min max]]
              Moves  the  selected  window  to  another desktop.  The arguments are the same as for the GotoDesk
              command.  Without any arguments, the window is  moved  to  the  current  desk.   MoveToDesk  is  a
              replacement for the obsolete WindowsDesk command, which can no longer be used.

       MoveThreshold [pixels]
              When  the user presses a mouse button upon an object fvwm waits to see if the action is a click or
              a drag.  If the mouse moves by more than pixels pixels it is assumed to be a drag.

              Previous versions of fvwm hardwired pixels to 3, which is now the default  value.   If  pixels  is
              negative  or  omitted  the  default value (which might be increased when 16000x9000 pixel displays
              become affordable) is restored.

       MoveToPage [options] [x[p | w] y[p | w]] | [prev]
              Moves the selected window to another page (x,y).  The upper left page is (0,0), the upper right is
              (M,0), where M is one  less  than  the  current  number  of  horizontal  pages  specified  in  the
              DesktopSize  command.   Similarly the lower left page is (0,N), and the lower right page is (M,N).
              Negative page numbers refer to pages from the rightmost/lowest page.  If x and y  are  not  given,
              the  window  is  moved  to  the current page (a window that has the focus but is off-screen can be
              retrieved with this).  Moving windows to a page relative to the current page can  be  achieved  by
              adding  a  trailing 'p' after any or both numerical arguments.  To move the window relative to its
              current location, add a trailing 'w'.  To move a window to the  previous  page  use  prev  as  the
              single argument.

              Windows are usually not moved beyond desk boundaries.

              Possible options are wrapx and wrapy to wrap around the x or y coordinate when the window is moved
              beyond  the  border of the desktop.  For example, with wrapx, when the window moves past the right
              edge of the desktop, it reappears on the left edge.  The  options  nodesklimitx  and  nodesklimity
              allow  moving  windows  beyond  the  desk boundaries in x and y direction (disabling the wrapx and
              wrapy options).

              Examples:

                  # Move window to page (2,3)
                  MoveToPage 2 3

                  # Move window to lowest and rightmost page
                  MoveToPage -1 -1

                  # Move window to last page visited
                  MoveToPage prev

                  # Move window two pages to the right and one
                  # page up, wrap at desk boundaries
                  MoveToPage wrapx wrapy +2p -1p

       MoveToScreen [screen]
              Moves the selected window to another Xinerama screen.  The screen argument  can  be  'p'  for  the
              primary  screen,  'c'  for  the  current screen (containing the mouse pointer), 'w' for the screen
              containing the center of +the context window, 'g' for the  global  screen  or  the  screen  number
              itself (counting from zero).

       OpaqueMoveSize [percentage]
              Tells  fvwm  the  maximum  size  window  with  which  opaque  window movement should be used.  The
              percentage is percent of the total screen area (may be greater than 100).  With

                  OpaqueMoveSize 0

              all windows are moved using the traditional rubber-band outline.  With

                  OpaqueMoveSize unlimited

              or if a negative percentage is given all windows are moved as solid windows.  The default is

                  OpaqueMoveSize 5

              which allows small windows to be moved in  an  opaque  manner  but  large  windows  are  moved  as
              rubber-bands.  If percentage is omitted or invalid the default value is set.  To resize windows in
              an opaque manner you can use the ResizeOpaque style.  See the Style command.

       PlaceAgain [Anim] [Icon]
              Causes  the  current window's position to be re-computed using the initial window placement logic.
              The window is moved to where it would have been if it were a new window that  had  just  appeared.
              Most  useful  with  Smart  or  Clever (ReallySmart) placement.  With the optional argument Anim an
              animated move is used to place the window in its new position.  With the additional  option  Icon,
              the icon is placed again instead.

       Raise
              Allows  the user to raise a window.  Note that this raises a window only in its layer.  To bring a
              window to the absolute top, use

                  AddToFunc raise-to-top
                   + I Layer 0 ontop
                   + I Raise

              where ontop is the highest layer used in your setup.

       RaiseLower
              Alternately raises and lowers a window.  The window is raised if it  is  obscured  by  any  window
              (except for its own transients when RaiseTransient style is used; see the Style command) otherwise
              it is lowered.

       Resize [[frame] [direction dir] [warptoborder automatic] [fixeddirection] [w]width[p | c | wa | da]
       [w]height[p | c]]
              Allows  for  resizing  a  window.   If  called from somewhere in a window or its border, then that
              window is resized.  If called from the root window then the user is allowed to select  the  target
              window.

              The  operation  can  be aborted with Escape or by pressing any mouse button (except button 1 which
              confirms it).

              If the optional arguments width and height are provided, then the window is resized  so  that  its
              dimensions  are  width  by  height.  The units of width and height are percent-of-screen, unless a
              letter 'p' is appended to one or both coordinates, in which case  the  location  is  specified  in
              pixels.  With a 'c' suffix the unit defined by the client application (hence the c) is used.  With
              the  suffix  'wa'  the value is a percentage of the width or height size of the EWMH working area,
              and with the suffix 'da' it is a percentage of the width or height of  the  EWMH  dynamic  working
              area.  So you can say

                  Resize 80c 24c

              to make a terminal window just big enough for 80x24 characters.

              If  the width or height is prefixed with the letter 'w' the size is not taken as an absolute value
              but added to the current size of the window.  Example:

                  # Enlarge window by one line
                  Resize keep w+1c

              Both, width and height can be negative.  In this case the new size is the screen  size  minus  the
              given  value.   If  either  value  is  "keep",  the  corresponding dimension of the window is left
              untouched.  The new size is the size of the client window, thus

                  Resize 100 100

              may make the window bigger than the screen.  To base the new size on the size of  the  whole  fvwm
              window,  add  the  frame  option  after  the  command.   The options fixeddirection, direction and
              warptoborder are only used in interactive move operations.  With fixeddirection the same border is
              moved even if the pointer moves past the opposite border.  The direction option must  be  followed
              by  a  direction  name  such  as  "NorthWest",  "South" or "East" (you get the idea).  Resizing is
              started immediately, even if the pointer is not on a border.  If the special option  automatic  is
              given as a direction argument, then the direction to resize is calculated based on the position of
              the  pointer  in  the window.  If the pointer is in the middle of the window, then no direction is
              calculated.  The warptoborder option can be used to warp the pointer to the  direction  indicated.
              As  with  the  automatic  option  for  direction, the border to warp to is calculated based on the
              pointer's proximity to a given border.  Also, if resizing is started by  clicking  on  the  window
              border, the pointer is warped to the outer edge of the border.

                  AddToFunc ResizeSE I Resize Direction SE
                  Mouse 3 A M ResizeSE

       Resize [bottomright | br x y]
              An  alternate  syntax  is used if the keyword bottomright or in short br follows the command name.
              In this case, the arguments x and y specify the desired position of the bottom right corner of the
              window.  They are interpreted exactly like the x and y arguments of the Move  command.   Actually,
              any of the options accepted by the Move command can be used.

       ResizeMaximize [resize-arguments]
              Combines the effects of Resize and Maximize in a single command.  When used on a maximized window,
              the window is resized and is still in the maximized state afterwards.  When used on an unmaximized
              window,  the window is resized and put into the maximized state afterwards.  This is useful if the
              user wants to resize the window temporarily  and  then  return  to  the  original  geometry.   The
              resize-arguments are the same as for the Resize command.

       ResizeMove resize-arguments move-arguments
              This  command  does  the  same as the Resize and Move commands, but in a single call which is less
              visually disturbing.  The resize-arguments are exactly  the  same  arguments  as  for  the  Resize
              command  and  the move-arguments are exactly the same arguments as for the Move command except the
              pointer option which is not supported by the ResizeMove command.

              Examples:

                  # Move window to top left corner and cover
                  # most of the screen
                  ResizeMove -10p -20p 0 0

                  # Grow the focused window towards the top of screen
                  Current Resize keep w+$[w.y]p keep 0

              Note: Fvwm may not be able to parse the command properly if the option bottomright of  the  Resize
              command is used.

       ResizeMoveMaximize resize-arguments move-arguments
              Combines  the  effects  of  ResizeMove and Maximize in a single command.  When used on a maximized
              window, the window is resized and moved and is still in the maximized state afterwards.  When used
              on an unmaximized window, the window is resized and put into the maximized state afterwards.  This
              is useful if the user wants to resize the window temporarily  and  then  return  to  the  original
              geometry.  The resize-arguments and move-arguments are the same as for the ResizeMove command.

       RestackTransients
              This  command  regroups  the  transients  of  a window close to it in the stacking order as if the
              window had just been lowered and then raised.  The position of the window itself is  not  altered.
              Only windows that use either the RaiseTransient or LowerTransient style are affected at all.  When
              RestackTransients  is  used  on  a transient window with the StackTransientParent style set, it is
              redirected to the parent window.

       SetAnimation milliseconds-delay [fractions-to-move-list]
              Sets the time between frames and the list of fractional offsets to customize the animated moves of
              the AnimatedMove command and the animation of menus (if the menu style is  set  to  animated;  see
              MenuStyle  command).   If  the  fractions-to-move-list is omitted, only the time between frames is
              altered.  The fractions-to-move-list specifies how  far  the  window  should  be  offset  at  each
              successive  frame  as  a  fraction  of the difference between the starting location and the ending
              location.  e.g.:

                  SetAnimation 10 -.01 0 .01 .03 .08 .18 .3 \
                    .45 .6 .75 .85 .90 .94 .97 .99 1.0

              Sets the delay between frames to 10 milliseconds, and sets the positions of the 16 frames  of  the
              animation  motion.   Negative values are allowed, and in particular can be used to make the motion
              appear more cartoonish, by briefly moving slightly in the opposite direction of the  main  motion.
              The above settings are the default.

       SnapAttraction [proximity [behaviour] [Screen]]
              The  SnapAttraction  command  is  obsolete.   It  has  been  replaced  by the Style command option
              SnapAttraction.

       SnapGrid [x-grid-size y-grid-size]
              The SnapGrid command is obsolete.  It has been replaced by the Style command option SnapGrid.

       WindowsDesk arg1 [arg2]
              Moves the selected window to another desktop.

              This command has been removed and must be replaced by MoveToDesk, the arguments for which are  the
              same as for the GotoDesk command.

              Important

              You cannot simply change the name of the command: the syntax has changed.  If you used:

                  WindowsDesk n

              to move a window to desk n, you have to change it to:

                  MoveToDesk 0 n

       XorPixmap [pixmap]
              Selects  the  pixmap  with which bits are xor'ed when doing rubber-band window moving or resizing.
              This has a better chance of making the rubber-band visible if XorValue does not give good results.
              An example pixmap resize.rainbow.xpm  is  provided  with  the  icon  distribution.   To  turn  the
              XorPixmap off again use the XorValue command or omit the pixmap argument.

       XorValue [number]
              Changes  the  value  with  which bits are xor'ed when doing rubber-band window moving or resizing.
              Valid values range from zero to the maximum value of an unsigned  long  integer  on  your  system.
              Setting  this  value is a trial-and-error process.  The default value 0 tries to find a value that
              gives a good contrast to black and white.  The default value  is  used  if  the  given  number  is
              omitted or invalid.

   Focus & Mouse Movement
       CursorMove horizontal[p] vertical[p]
              Moves  the  mouse  pointer  by  horizontal  pages  in  the X direction and vertical pages in the Y
              direction.  Either or both entries may be negative.   Both  horizontal  and  vertical  values  are
              expressed in percent of pages, so

                  CursorMove 100 100

              means to move down and right by one full page.

                  CursorMove 50 25

              means  to move right half a page and down a quarter of a page.  Alternatively, the distance can be
              specified in pixels by appending a 'p' to  the  horizontal  and/or  vertical  specification.   For
              example

                  CursorMove -10p -10p

              means  move  ten pixels up and ten pixels left.  The CursorMove function should not be called from
              pop-up menus.

       FlipFocus [NoWarp]
              Executes a Focus command as if the user had used the pointer to select the window.   This  command
              alters  the  order  of  the  WindowList in the same way as clicking in a window to focus, i.e. the
              target window is removed from the WindowList and placed at the start.  This command is recommended
              for use with the Direction command and in the function invoked from WindowList.

       Focus [NoWarp]
              Sets the keyboard focus to the selected window.  If the NoWarp argument is given, this is  all  it
              does.   Otherwise  it  also  moves  the  viewport  or window as needed to make the selected window
              visible.  This command does not automatically raise the window.  Does not warp  the  pointer  into
              the  selected  window  (see  WarpToWindow  function).  Does not de-iconify.  This command does not
              alter the order of the WindowList, it rotates the WindowList around so that the target  window  is
              at the start.

              When  the  NoWarp  argument is given, Focus cannot transfer the keyboard focus to windows on other
              desks.

              To raise and/or warp a pointer to a window together with Focus or FlipFocus, use a function, like:

                  AddToFunc SelectWindow
                  + I Focus
                  + I Iconify false
                  + I Raise
                  + I WarpToWindow 50 8p

       WarpToWindow [!raise | raise] x[p] y[p]
              Warps the cursor to the associated window and raises it (unless the  option  !raise  is  present).
              The parameters x and y default to percentage of window down and in from the upper left hand corner
              (or  number of pixels down and in if 'p' is appended to the numbers).  If a number is negative the
              opposite edge is used and the direction reversed.  This command works also with windows  that  are
              not  managed  by  fvwm.   In this case fvwm does not bring the window onto the screen if it is not
              visible.  For example it is possible to warp the pointer to the  center  of  the  root  window  on
              screen 1:

                  WindowId root 1 WarpToWindow 50 50

   Window State
       Close
              If  the  window  accepts  the  delete window protocol a message is sent to the window asking it to
              gracefully remove itself.  If the window does not understand the delete window protocol  then  the
              window  is  destroyed  as with the Destroy command.  Note: if the window accepts the delete window
              protocol but does not close itself in response, the window is not deleted.

       Delete
              Sends a message to a window asking that it remove itself, frequently causing  the  application  to
              exit.

       Destroy
              Destroys an application window, which usually causes the application to crash and burn.

       Iconify [bool]
              Iconifies  a  window if it is not already iconified or de-iconifies it if it is already iconified.
              The optional argument bool is a boolean argument.  "True" means  only  iconification  is  allowed,
              while "False" forces de-iconification.  Using "toggle" switches between iconified and de-iconified
              states.

              There  are  a  number  of Style options which influence the appearance and behavior of icons (e.g.
              StickyIcon, NoIcon).

              For backward compatibility, the optional argument may also be a positive number instead of "True",
              or a negative number instead of "False".  Note that this syntax is obsolete, and will  be  removed
              in the future.

       Maximize [flags] [bool | forget] [horizontal[p]] [vertical[p]]
              Without  its  optional  arguments  (or if the bool bit has the value "toggle") Maximize causes the
              window to alternately switch from a full-screen size to its normal size.  To force a  window  into
              maximized (normal) state you can use a "True" or "False" value for the bool argument.

              With  just  the parameter "forget" a maximized window reverts back into normal state but keeps its
              current maximized size.  This can be useful in conjunction with the  commands  ResizeMaximize  and
              ResizeMoveMaximize.  If the window is not maximized, nothing happens.

              With  the  optional arguments horizontal and vertical, which are expressed as percentage of a full
              screen, the user can control the new size of the window.  An optional suffix 'p' can  be  used  to
              indicate  pixels instead of percents of the screen size.  If horizontal is greater than 0 then the
              horizontal dimension of the window is set to horizontal*screen_width/100.  If the value is smaller
              than 0 the size is subtracted from the screen width, i.e. -25 is the same as 75.  If horizontal is
              "grow", it is maximized to current available space  until  finding  any  obstacle.   The  vertical
              resizing  is  similar.   If  both horizontal and vertical values are "grow", it expands vertically
              first, then horizontally to find space.  Instead of the horizontal "grow" argument, "growleft"  or
              "growright"  can  be  used respectively "growup" and "growdown".  The optional flags argument is a
              space separated list containing the following key words: fullscreen,  ewmhiwa,  growonwindowlayer,
              growonlayers  and  screen.  fullscreen causes the window to become fullscreened if the appropriate
              EWMH hint is set.  ewmhiwa causes fvwm to ignore the EWMH working area.  growonwindowlayer  causes
              the various grow methods to ignore windows with a layer other than the current layer of the window
              which  is  maximized.   The growonlayers option must have two integer arguments.  The first one is
              the minimum layer and the second one the maximum layer to use.  Windows that are outside  of  this
              range of layers are ignored by the grow methods.  A negative value as the first or second argument
              means  to  assume  no  minimum or maximum layer.  screen must have an argument which specifies the
              Xinerama screen on which to operate.  It can be 'p' for the primary screen, 'c'  for  the  current
              screen  (containing  the  mouse  pointer),  'g'  for the global screen or the screen number itself
              (counting from zero).  This option is only useful with multiple Xinerama screens.

              Here are some examples.  The following adds a title-bar button to switch  a  window  to  the  full
              vertical size of the screen:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 0 100

              The following causes windows to be stretched to the full width:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 100 0

              This makes a window that is half the screen size in each direction:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 50 50

              To expand a window horizontally until any other window is found:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 0 grow

              To expand a window until any other window on the same or a higher layer is hit.

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize growonlayers $[w.layer] -1 grow grow

              To expand a window but leave the lower 60 pixels of the screen unoccupied:

                  Mouse 0 4 A Maximize 100 -60p

              Values larger than 100 can be used with caution.

       Recapture
              This command is obsolete and should not be used anymore.  Should you want to do something specific
              that   you   cannot   do  without  it,  please  report  this  to  the  fvwm-workers  mailing  list
              <fvwm-workers@fvwm.org>.  This command may be removed at some point in the  future.   Please  read
              the  note  at the end of the section Delayed Execution of Commands to learn about how to avoid the
              Recapture command.

              Causes fvwm to recapture all of its windows.  This ensures that the latest  style  parameters  are
              used.  The recapture operation is visually disturbing.

              Since  fvwm  version  2.4  only  a  very  few  Style options need a Recapture to take effect (e.g.
              UseStyle).

       RecaptureWindow
              This command is obsolete and should not be used anymore.  See Recapture For details.

              Causes fvwm to recapture the chosen window.

       Refresh
              Causes all windows on the screen to redraw themselves.  All pending updates of all windows' styles
              and looks are applied immediately.  E.g. if Style or TitleStyle commands were issued inside a fvwm
              function.

       RefreshWindow
              Causes the chosen window to redraw itself.  All pending updates of the window's style and look are
              applied immediately.  E.g. if Style or TitleStyle commands were issued inside a fvwm function.

       Stick [bool]
              If the bool argument is empty or "toggle", the Stick command makes a window sticky if  it  is  not
              already  sticky, or non-sticky if it is already sticky.  To make a window sticky regardless of its
              current state the bool argument must be "True".  To make it non-sticky use "False".

       StickAcrossPages [bool]
              Works like Stick but only sticks a window across pages, not across desks.

       StickAcrossDesks [bool]
              Works like Stick but only sticks a window across desks, not across pages.

       WindowShade [bool] | [[ShadeAgain] direction]
              Toggles the window shade feature for titled windows.  Windows in the shaded state only  display  a
              title-bar.   If  bool  is  not  given  or "toggle", the window shade state is toggled.  If bool is
              "True", the window is forced to the shaded state.  If bool is "False", then the window  is  forced
              to  the  non-shaded state.  To force shading in a certain direction, the direction argument can be
              used.  Any of the strings "North", "South", "West", "East", "NorthWest", "NorthEast", "SouthWest",
              "SouthEast" or "Last" can be given.  The direction can be abbreviated with the usual  one  or  two
              letters  "N",  "NW",  etc.   Using  a  direction  on a window that was already shaded unshades the
              window.  To shade it in a different direction, use the  ShadeAgain  option.   The  direction  Last
              shades the window in the direction it last was shaded.  If the window has never been shaded before
              it is shaded as if no direction had been given.  Windows without titles can be shaded too.  Please
              refer    also   to   the   options   WindowShadeSteps,   WindowShadeShrinks,   WindowShadeScrolls,
              WindowShadeLazy,  WindowShadeAlwaysLazy  and  WindowShadeBusy  options  of  the   Style   command.
              Examples:

                  Style * WindowShadeShrinks, WindowShadeSteps 20, \
                          WindowShadeLazy
                  Mouse 1 - S WindowShade North
                  Mouse 1 [ S WindowShade West
                  Mouse 1 ] S WindowShade E
                  Mouse 1 _ S WindowShade S

              Note:  When  a  window that has been shaded with a direction argument changes the direction of the
              window title (see TitleAtTop Style option), the shading direction does not change.  This may  look
              very  strange.  Windows that were shaded without a direction argument stay shaded in the direction
              of the title bar.

              For backward compatibility, the optional argument may also be 1 to signify "on", and 2 to  signify
              "off".  Note that this syntax is obsolete, and will be removed in the future.

       WindowShadeAnimate [steps [p]]
              This command is obsolete.  Please use the WindowShadeSteps option of the Style command instead.

   Mouse, Key & Stroke Bindings
       IgnoreModifiers [Modifiers]
              Tells fvwm which modifiers to ignore when matching Mouse or Key bindings.  IgnoreModifiers affects
              the  ClickToFocus  style  too.   This command belongs into your config.  If you issue it when your
              fvwm session is already up and running the results are unpredictable.  The  should  appear  before
              any applications or modules are started in your config file (e.g. with the Exec command).

              Modifiers  has  the  same syntax as in the Mouse or Key bindings, with the addition of 'L' meaning
              the caps lock key.  The default is "L".  Modifiers  can  be  omitted,  meaning  no  modifiers  are
              ignored.   This  command  comes  in handy if the num-lock and scroll-lock keys interfere with your
              shortcuts.  With XFree86 '2' usually is the num-lock modifier and '5' refers  to  the  scroll-lock
              key.  To turn all these pesky modifiers off you can use this command:

                  IgnoreModifiers L25

              If the Modifiers argument is the string "default", fvwm reverts back to the default value "L".

              Important  This  command  creates  a  lot of extra network traffic, depending on your CPU, network
              connection, the number of Key or Mouse commands in your  configuration  file  and  the  number  of
              modifiers  you  want  to ignore.  If you do not have a lightning fast machine or very few bindings
              you should not ignore more than two modifiers.  I.e. do not ignore  scroll-lock  if  you  have  no
              problem with it.  In the FAQ you can find a better solution of this problem.

       EdgeCommand [direction [Function]]
              Binds  a  specified  fvwm  command  Function  to  an  edge of the screen.  Direction may be one of
              "North", "Top", "West", "Left", "South", "Bottom", "Right" and "East".  If Function is omitted the
              binding for this edge is removed.  If  EdgeCommand  is  called  without  any  arguments  all  edge
              bindings are removed.

              Function  is  executed  when  the  mouse pointer enters the invisible pan frames that surround the
              visible screen.  The binding works only if EdgeThickness is set to a value greater than 0.   If  a
              function  is bound to an edge, scrolling specified by EdgeScroll is disabled for this edge.  It is
              possible to bind a function only to some edges and  use  the  other  edges  for  scrolling.   This
              command  is  intended  to  raise  or  lower certain windows when the mouse pointer enters an edge.
              FvwmAuto can be used get a delay when raising or lowering windows.  The following  example  raises
              FvwmButtons if the mouse pointer enters the top edge of the screen.

                  # Disable EdgeScrolling but make it possible
                  # to move windows over the screen edge
                  EdgeResistance -1
                  Style * EdgeMoveDelay 250
                  Style * EdgeMoveResistance 20

                  # Set thickness of the edge of the screen to 1
                  EdgeThickness 1

                  # Give focus to FvwmButtons if the mouse
                  # hits top edge
                  EdgeCommand Top Next (FvwmButtons) Focus
                  # Make sure the Next command matches the window
                  Style FvwmButtons CirculateHit

                  Module FvwmButtons
                  Module FvwmAuto 100 "Silent AutoRaiseFunction" \
                       "Silent AutoLowerFunction"

                  # If any window except FvwmButtons has
                  # focus when calling this function
                  # FvwmButtons are lowered
                  DestroyFunc AutoLowerFunction
                  AddToFunc AutoLowerFunction
                  + I Current (!FvwmButtons) All (FvwmButtons) Lower

                  # If FvwmButtons has focus when calling this function raise it
                  DestroyFunc AutoRaiseFunction
                  AddToFunc AutoRaiseFunction
                  + I Current (FvwmButtons) Raise

              Normally,  the  invisible pan frames are only on the screen edges that border virtual pages.  If a
              screen edge has a command bound to it, the pan frame is always created on that edge.

       EdgeLeaveCommand [direction [Function]]
              Binds a specified fvwm command Function to an edge  of  the  screen.   Direction  may  be  one  of
              "North", "Top", "West", "Left", "South", "Bottom", "Right" and "East".  If Function is omitted the
              binding  for  this  edge is removed.  If EdgeLeaveCommand is called without any arguments all edge
              bindings are removed.

              Function is executed when the mouse pointer leaves the invisible  pan  frames  that  surround  the
              visible  screen.   The binding works only if EdgeThickness is set to a value greater than 0.  If a
              function is bound to an edge, scrolling specified by EdgeScroll is disabled for this edge.  It  is
              possible  to  bind  a  function  only  to  some edges and use the other edges for scrolling.  This
              command is intended to raise or lower certain windows when  the  mouse  pointer  leaves  an  edge.
              FvwmAuto can be used get a delay when raising or lowering windows.  See example for EdgeCommand

              Normally,  the  invisible pan frames are only on the screen edges that border virtual pages.  If a
              screen edge has a command bound to it, the pan frame is always created on that edge.

       Key [(window)] Keyname Context Modifiers Function
              Binds a keyboard key to a specified fvwm command, or removes the binding if Function is '-'.   The
              syntax  is  the same as for a Mouse binding except that the mouse button number is replaced with a
              Keyname.  Normally, the key binding is activated when the key is pressed.  Keyname is  a  standard
              X11  key  name as defined in /usr/include/X11/keysymdef.h, (without the XK_ prefix), or the keysym
              database /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XKeysymDB.  Only key names that are generated with no modifier keys or
              with just the Shift key held are guaranteed to work.  The Context and Modifiers fields are defined
              as in the Mouse binding.  However, when you press a key the context window is the window that  has
              the  keyboard  focus.   That  is  not necessarily the same as the window the pointer is over (with
              SloppyFocus or ClickToFocus).  Note that key bindings with the 'R' (root window)  context  do  not
              work  properly  with  SloppyFocus and ClickToFocus.  If you encounter problems, use the PointerKey
              command instead.  If you want to bind keys to a window with SloppyFocus or ClickToFocus  that  are
              supposed  to  work  when  the pointer is not over the window, fvwm assumes the pointer is over the
              client window (i.e. you have to use the 'W' context).

              The special context 'M' for menus can be used to (re)define the menu controls.  It be  used  alone
              or together with 'T', 'S', 'I', '[', ']', '-' and '_'.  See the Menu Bindings section for details.

              The  following example binds the built-in window list to pop up when Alt-Ctrl-Shift-F11 is hit, no
              matter where the mouse pointer is:

                  Key F11 A SCM WindowList

              Binding a key to a title-bar button causes that button to  appear.   Please  refer  to  the  Mouse
              command for details.

       Mouse [(window)] Button Context Modifiers Function
              Defines  a  mouse  binding, or removes the binding if Function is '-'.  Button is the mouse button
              number.  If Button is zero then any button performs the specified function.  Note that only  mouse
              buttons  1  to 5 are fully supported by X11.  Any number above this works only partially.  Complex
              functions can not be used with these buttons and neither any operation that requires dragging  the
              pointer with the button held.  This is due to limitations of X11.  By default, the highest allowed
              button number is 9.

              Context  describes where the binding applies.  Valid contexts are 'R' for the root window, 'W' for
              an application window, 'D' for a desktop application (as kdesktop or Nautilus desktop), 'T' for  a
              window  title-bar,  'S' for a window side, top, or bottom bar, '[', ']', '-' and '_' for the left,
              right, top or bottom side only, 'F' for a window frame (the corners), '<', '^', '>'  and  'v'  for
              the  top  left,  top  right,  bottom  right  or bottom left corner, 'I' for an icon window, or '0'
              through '9' for title-bar buttons, or any combination of these letters.  'A' is for  any  context.
              For  instance,  a  context of "FST" applies when the mouse is anywhere in a window's border except
              the title-bar buttons.  Only 'S' and 'W' are valid for an undecorated window.

              The special context 'M' for menus can be used to (re)define the menu controls.   It  can  be  used
              alone  or  together  with 'T', 'S', 'I', '[', ']', '-' and '_'.  See the Menu Bindings section for
              details.

              The special context 'P' controls what buttons that can be used to place a window.  When using this
              context no modifiers are allowed (Modifiers must be N), no window is  allowed,  and  the  Function
              must   be   one   of   PlaceWindow,   PlaceWindowDrag,   PlaceWindowInteractive,  CancelPlacement,
              CancelPlacementDrag, CancelPlacementInteractive or -.

              PlaceWindow makes Button usable  for  window  placement,  both  for  interactive  and  drag  move.
              CancelPlacement  does  the  inverse.  That is makes Button to cancel move for both interactive and
              drag move.  It may however not override how new windows are resized after being placed.   This  is
              controlled  by the Emulate command.  Also a window being dragged can always be placed by releasing
              the button hold while dragging, regardless of if it is set to PlaceWindow or not.

              PlaceWindowDrag and PlaceWindowInteractive/CancelPlacementDrag and CancelPlacementInteractive work
              as PlaceWindow/CancelPlacement with the exception that they only affect either windows  dragged  /
              placed interactively.

              - is equivalent to CancelPlacement.

              The  following  example  makes all buttons but button 3 usable for interactive placement and makes
              drag moves started by other buttons than one cancel if button 1 is pressed  before  finishing  the
              move:

                  Mouse 0 P N PlaceWindow
                  Mouse 3 P N CancelPlacement
                  Mouse 1 P N CancelPlacementDrag

              By  default,  the  binding applies to all windows.  You can specify that a binding only applies to
              specific windows by specifying the window name in brackets.  The window name is a wildcard pattern
              specifying the class, resource or name of the window you want the binding to apply to.

              The following example shows how the same key-binding can be used to  perform  different  functions
              depending on the window that is focused:

                  Key (rxvt)  V A C Echo ctrl-V-in-RXVT
                  Key (*term) V A C Echo ctrl-V-in-Term
                  Key (*vim)  V A C --
                  Key         V A C Echo ctrl-V-elsewhere

              A  '--'  action  indicates  that the event should be propagated to the specified window to handle.
              This is only a valid action for window-specific bindings.

              This example shows how to display the WindowList when Button 3 is pressed on an rxvt window:

                  Mouse (rxvt) 3 A A WindowList

              Note that Fvwm actually intercepts all events for a window-specific binding and  (if  the  focused
              window doesn't match any of the bindings) sends a synthetic copy of the event to the window.  This
              should  be  transparent  to most applications, however (for security reasons) some programs ignore
              these synthetic events by default - xterm is one of them.  To enable handling of these events, add
              the following line to your ~/.Xdefaults file:

                  XTerm*allowSendEvents:  true

              Modifiers is any combination of 'N' for no modifiers, 'C' for control,  'S'  for  shift,  'M'  for
              Meta,  'L'  for  Caps-Lock  or 'A' for any modifier.  For example, a modifier of "SM" applies when
              both the Meta and Shift keys are down.  X11 modifiers mod1 through mod5  are  represented  as  the
              digits  '1'  through  '5'.   The  modifier  'L'  is  ignored  by  default.  To turn it on, use the
              IgnoreModifiers command.

              Function is one of fvwm's commands.

              The title-bar buttons are numbered with odd numbered buttons on the left side of the title-bar and
              even numbers on the right.  Smaller-numbered buttons are  displayed  toward  the  outside  of  the
              window  while  larger-numbered buttons appear toward the middle of the window (0 is short for 10).
              In summary, the buttons are numbered:

                  1 3 5 7 9    0 8 6 4 2

              The highest odd numbered button which has an action bound to it determines the number  of  buttons
              drawn  on  the left side of the title bar.  The highest even number determines the number of right
              side buttons which are drawn.  Actions can be bound to either mouse buttons or keyboard keys.

       PointerKey [(window)] Keyname Context Modifiers Function
              This command works exactly like the Key command.  The only difference is that the binding operates
              on the window under the pointer.  Normal key bindings operate on the focused window instead.   The
              PointerKey  command  can  for  example  be  used  to bind keys to the root window if you are using
              SloppyFocus or ClickToFocus.  However, some applications (xterm is  one  example)  are  unable  to
              handle  this  key anymore, even if the pointer is over the xterm window.  It is recommended to use
              the PointerKey command only for key combinations that are not needed in any application window.

              Example:

                  Style * SloppyFocus
                  PointerKey f1 a m Menu MainMenu

       Stroke [(window)] Sequence Button Context Modifiers Function
              Binds a mouse stroke sequence to a specified fvwm command, or removes the binding if  Function  is
              '-'.   The  syntax is the same as for a Mouse binding except that Sequence is inserted in front of
              the button number and a value of 0 for Button concerns the StrokeFunc command.   The  Context  and
              Modifiers  fields are defined as in the Mouse binding.  However, only the 'R' Context really works
              (if you want to use other contexts you need to use the StrokeFunc below).

              Strokes sequences are defined in a telephone grid like this:

                   1  2  3

                   4  5  6

                   7  8  9

              or in a numeric pad grid like this:

                   7  8  9

                   4  5  6

                   1  2  3

              The telephone grid is used by default, to use the numeric pad grid you should begin  the  sequence
              with  a  'N'.   Note  that  a  complex  motion  may  produce  several different sequences (see the
              "netscape" example below to handle such motion).  Moreover, sequences are limited to  20  elements
              (with  the  present  version  of libstroke), however, in practice it is preferable to use sequence
              with less than 12 elements.

              Because of the default button menu in fvwm, you may need to remove a mouse button  binding  (using
              an empty action) before using the stroke

                  Mouse 3 R N

              Also, you can still use the stroke "sequence 0" to simulate a click:

                  Stroke 0 3 R N Menu WindowList Nop

              The  following  example  starts xterm when the mouse drags an 'I' on the root window with button 3
              pressed down:

                  Stroke 258  3  R  N  Exec exec xterm

              An example for Netscape:

                  Stroke 7415963    3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 74148963   3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 74158963   3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 7418963    3  R  N  Exec exec netscape
                  Stroke 415963     3  R  N  Exec exec netscape

              You may prefer to use the numeric pad grid since you have such a grid on your  machine.   Here  an
              example:

                  Stroke N78963214   3  R  N FvwmForm FvwmForm-QuitVerify
                  Stroke N789632147  3  R  N FvwmForm FvwmForm-QuitVerify

              This example starts the "QuitVerify" form if you draw a box that begins in the top left corner.

              Note:  You  need  libstroke  installed  and  fvwm  compiled with stroke support.  libstroke can be
              obtained at http://www.etla.net/~willey/projects/libstroke/

       StrokeFunc [Options]
              Causes fvwm to record a mouse stroke sequence and to execute the corresponding action  as  defined
              in  a  Stroke  command.   The  cursor is modified to the STROKE context of the CursorStyle command
              during recording.  When the stroke is finished StrokeFunc looks for a stroke binding of the form

                  Stroke sequence 0 Context Modifiers action

              and executes the corresponding action (Note the 0).  Normal use of this function is via a Mouse or
              Key command.  Examples:

                  Mouse 3 A M StrokeFunc
                  Key x R N StrokeFunc

              If you press mouse button 3 and Alt anywhere (respectively, press the key x when the cursor is  on
              the  root window), then fvwm records the mouse motions until the mouse button 3 (respectively, the
              x key) is released and then check if the recorded sequence corresponds to a stroke binding of  the
              form

                  "Stroke sequence 0 A M action"
                  "Stroke sequence 0 R N action"

              Note  that the Context and Modifiers are taken at the beginning of the execution of the StrokeFunc
              command (so you can release the modifiers before the end of the stroke recording in the case of  a
              mouse  binding  and  if  you  used,  say,  a  title-bar context the mouse motion can go through an
              application window).  The keys Escape and Delete allow you to abort the command.

              The StrokeFunc command has five options: NotStayPressed, EchoSequence,  DrawMotion,  FeedBack  and
              StrokeWidth.   These  options  are  disabled  by  default.   EchoSequence  causes fvwm to Echo the
              recorded stroke sequence.  DrawMotion causes  fvwm  to  draw  the  mouse  motion  on  the  screen.
              FeedBack  causes fvwm to display during a fraction of second the cursor of the WAIT context of the
              CursorStyle command if the recorded stroke sequence corresponds to a stroke binding.   StrokeWidth
              takes  an  integer argument, which must be >= 0 and <= 100 and which defines the width of the line
              for the DrawMotion option.

              NotStayPressed works only if StrokeFunc is used via a Mouse or a Key command.  This option removes
              the need to have a button or the key pressed during the stroke, but you have to do a  mouse  click
              or  press  the  Return  or  Space  key  to finish the mouse motion recording (these keys also work
              without the NotStayPressed option).

              You can use the StrokeFunc "alone".  In this case it works as above with the NotStayPressed option
              enabled.  However, Modifiers, in general, may not work as expected (i.e., in this case use 'A'  or
              'N' as Modifiers in the stroke bindings).

              Note  that  some  computers do not support key release events.  If that is the case the StrokeFunc
              used via a Key command works as if the NotStayPressed option is enabled.

   Controlling Window Styles
       For readability, the commands in this section are not sorted  alphabetically.   The  description  of  the
       Style command can be found at the end of this section.

       FocusStyle stylename options
              works  exactly  like the Style command, but accepts only the focus policy related styles beginning
              with "FP".  The prefix can be removed, but at the cost of a little bit  of  time.   FocusStyle  is
              meant to make the configuration file more readable.  Example:

                  FocusStyle * EnterToFocus, !LeaveToUnfocus

              is equivalent to

                  Style * FPEnterToFocus, !FPLeaveToUnfocus

       DestroyStyle style
              deletes  the  style  named  style.  The changes take effect immediately.  Note that style is not a
              wild-carded search string, but rather a  case-sensitive  string  that  should  exactly  match  the
              original Style command.

              Destroying style "*" can be done, but isn't really to be recommended.  For example:

                  DestroyStyle Application*

              This  removes  all  settings  for  the  style  named  "Application*", NOT all styles starting with
              "Application".

       DestroyWindowStyle
              deletes the styles set by the WindowStyle command on the selected window.  The changes take effect
              immediately.

       UpdateStyles
              All pending updates of all windows' styles and looks are  applied  immediately.   E.g.  if  Style,
              WindowStyle or TitleStyle commands were issued inside a fvwm function.

       Style stylename options ...
              The Style command is used to set attributes of a window to values other than the default or to set
              the window manager default styles.

              stylename  can  be  a  window's name, class, visible name, or resource string.  It may contain the
              wildcards '*' and '?', which are matched in  the  usual  Unix  filename  manner.   Multiple  style
              options  in  a  single  Style command are read from left to right as if they were issued one after
              each other in separate commands.  A given style always overrides all conflicting styles that  have
              been issued earlier (or further left on the same style line).

              Note:  windows that have no name (WM_NAME) are given a name of "Untitled", and windows that do not
              have a class (WM_CLASS, res_class) are given class "NoClass" and those that do not have a resource
              (WM_CLASS, res_name) are given resource "NoResource".

              If a window has the resource "fvwmstyle" set, the value of that resource is used  in  addition  to
              any window names when selecting the style.

              options is a comma separated list containing one or more of the following keywords.  Each group of
              style  names  is  separated  by  slashes  ('/').   The  last style in these groups is the default.
              BorderWidth, HandleWidth, !Icon / Icon, MiniIcon, IconBox, IconGrid, IconFill, IconSize, !Title  /
              Title,   TitleAtBottom   /   TitleAtLeft   /   TitleAtRight  /  TitleAtTop,  LeftTitleRotatedCW  /
              LeftTitleRotatedCCW,    RightTitleRotatedCCW    /    RightTitleRotatedCW,    TopTitleRotated     /
              TopTitleNotRotated,   BottomTitleRotated   /   BottomTitleNotRotated,   !UseTitleDecorRotation   /
              UseTitleDecorRotation, StippledTitle /  !StippledTitle,  StippledIconTitle  /  !StippledIconTitle,
              IndexedWindowName    /   ExactWindowName,   IndexedIconName   /   ExactIconName,   TitleFormat   /
              IconTitleFormat /  !Borders  /  Borders,  !Handles  /  Handles,  WindowListSkip  /  WindowListHit,
              CirculateSkip  /  CirculateHit,  CirculateSkipShaded  /  CirculateHitShaded,  CirculateSkipIcon  /
              CirculateHitIcon,  Layer,  StaysOnTop   /   StaysOnBottom   /   StaysPut,   Sticky   /   Slippery,
              StickyAcrossPages     /     !StickyAcrossPages,     StickyAcrossDesks     /    !StickyAcrossDesks,
              !StickyStippledTitle / StickyStippledTitle,  !StickyStippledIconTitle  /  StickyStippledIconTitle,
              StartIconic  /  StartNormal,  Color,  ForeColor,  BackColor,  Colorset,  HilightFore, HilightBack,
              HilightColorset,         BorderColorset,         HilightBorderColorset,         IconTitleColorset,
              HilightIconTitleColorset,     IconBackgroundColorset,    IconTitleRelief,    IconBackgroundRelief,
              IconBackgroundPadding,   Font,   IconFont,   StartsOnDesk   /   StartsOnPage   /   StartsAnyWhere,
              StartsOnScreen,     StartShaded     /     !StartShaded,     ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage    /
              ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage,   CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage   /    CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage,
              RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage   /   RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage,  StartsOnPageIncludesTransients  /
              StartsOnPageIgnoresTransients, IconTitle /  !IconTitle,  MwmButtons  /  FvwmButtons,  MwmBorder  /
              FvwmBorder,  MwmDecor  /  !MwmDecor,  MwmFunctions  / !MwmFunctions, HintOverride / !HintOverride,
              !Button / Button, ResizeHintOverride / !ResizeHintOverride, OLDecor /  !OLDecor,  GNOMEUseHints  /
              GNOMEIgnoreHints,  StickyIcon  /  SlipperyIcon,  StickyAcrossPagesIcon  /  !StickyAcrossPagesIcon,
              StickyAcrossDesksIcon   /   !StickyAcrossDesksIcon,   ManualPlacement   /    CascadePlacement    /
              MinOverlapPlacement  /  MinOverlapPercentPlacement  / TileManualPlacement / TileCascadePlacement /
              PositionPlacement,       MinOverlapPlacementPenalties,        MinOverlapPercentPlacementPenalties,
              DecorateTransient  /  NakedTransient,  DontRaiseTransient  /  RaiseTransient, DontLowerTransient /
              LowerTransient,  DontStackTransientParent  /  StackTransientParent,  SkipMapping  /   ShowMapping,
              ScatterWindowGroups  /  KeepWindowGroupsOnDesk,  UseDecor, UseStyle, !UsePPosition / NoPPosition /
              UsePPosition,    !UseUSPosition,    NoUSPosition    /    UseUSPosition,    !UseTransientPPosition,
              NoTransientPPosition  /  UseTransientPPosition,  !UseTransientUSPosition / NoTransientUSPosition /
              UseTransientUSPosition, !UseIconPosition / NoIconPosition / UseIconPosition, Lenience / !Lenience,
              ClickToFocus / SloppyFocus / MouseFocus|FocusFollowsMouse / NeverFocus, ClickToFocusPassesClickOff
              / ClickToFocusPassesClick, ClickToFocusRaisesOff  /  ClickToFocusRaises,  MouseFocusClickRaises  /
              MouseFocusClickRaisesOff,  GrabFocus  /  GrabFocusOff, GrabFocusTransientOff / GrabFocusTransient,
              FPFocusClickButtons, FPFocusClickModifiers,  !FPSortWindowlistByFocus  /  FPSortWindowlistByFocus,
              FPClickRaisesFocused        /       !FPClickRaisesFocused,       FPClickDecorRaisesFocused       /
              !FPClickDecorRaisesFocused,      FPClickIconRaisesFocused       /       !FPClickIconRaisesFocused,
              !FPClickRaisesUnfocused      /      FPClickRaisesUnfocused,      FPClickDecorRaisesUnfocused     /
              !FPClickDecorRaisesUnfocused,    FPClickIconRaisesUnfocused     /     !FPClickIconRaisesUnfocused,
              FPClickToFocus / !FPClickToFocus, FPClickDecorToFocus / !FPClickDecorToFocus, FPClickIconToFocus /
              !FPClickIconToFocus,  !FPEnterToFocus  /  FPEnterToFocus,  !FPLeaveToUnfocus  /  FPLeaveToUnfocus,
              !FPFocusByProgram     /     FPFocusByProgram,     !FPFocusByFunction     /      FPFocusByFunction,
              FPFocusByFunctionWarpPointer    /    !FPFocusByFunctionWarpPointer,    FPLenient   /   !FPLenient,
              !FPPassFocusClick     /     FPPassFocusClick,      !FPPassRaiseClick      /      FPPassRaiseClick,
              FPIgnoreFocusClickMotion      /      !FPIgnoreFocusClickMotion,     FPIgnoreRaiseClickMotion     /
              !FPIgnoreRaiseClickMotion,      !FPAllowFocusClickFunction      /       FPAllowFocusClickFunction,
              !FPAllowRaiseClickFunction    /    FPAllowRaiseClickFunction,    FPGrabFocus    /    !FPGrabFocus,
              !FPGrabFocusTransient  /   FPGrabFocusTransient,   FPOverrideGrabFocus   /   !FPOverrideGrabFocus,
              FPReleaseFocus    /    !FPReleaseFocus,    !FPReleaseFocusTransient   /   FPReleaseFocusTransient,
              FPOverrideReleaseFocus / !FPOverrideReleaseFocus, StartsLowered /  StartsRaised,  IgnoreRestack  /
              AllowRestack,    FixedPosition   /   VariablePosition,   FixedUSPosition   /   VariableUSPosition,
              FixedPPosition /  VariablePPosition,  FixedSize  /  VariableSize,  FixedUSSize  /  VariableUSSize,
              FixedPSize  /  VariablePSize,  !Closable  /  Closable,  !Iconifiable / Iconifiable, !Maximizable /
              Maximizable, !AllowMaximizeFixedSize / AllowMaximizeFixedSize,  IconOverride  /  NoIconOverride  /
              NoActiveIconOverride,    DepressableBorder    /    FirmBorder,    MinWindowSize,    MaxWindowSize,
              IconifyWindowGroups  /  IconifyWindowGroupsOff,  ResizeOpaque  /  ResizeOutline,  BackingStore   /
              BackingStoreOff   /   BackingStoreWindowDefault,   Opacity   /   ParentalRelativity,  SaveUnder  /
              SaveUnderOff, WindowShadeShrinks / WindowShadeScrolls, WindowShadeSteps,  WindowShadeAlwaysLazy  /
              WindowShadeBusy  /  WindowShadeLazy,  EWMHDonateIcon  /  EWMHDontDonateIcon,  EWMHDonateMiniIcon /
              EWMHDontDonateMiniIcon, EWMHMiniIconOverride / EWMHNoMiniIconOverride, EWMHUseStackingOrderHints /
              EWMHIgnoreStackingOrderHints, EWMHIgnoreStateHints  /  EWMHUseStateHints,  EWMHIgnoreStrutHints  /
              EWMHUseStrutHints,  EWMHIgnoreWindowType  / !EWMHIgnoreWindowType, EWMHMaximizeIgnoreWorkingArea /
              EWMHMaximizeUseWorkingArea / EWMHMaximizeUseDynamicWorkingArea,  EWMHPlacementIgnoreWorkingArea  /
              EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea  / EWMHPlacementUseDynamicWorkingArea, MoveByProgramMethod, Unmanaged,
              State,   SnapGrid,   SnapAttraction,    EdgeMoveDelay,    EdgeResizeDelay.     EdgeMoveResistance,
              InitialMapCommand

              In   the   above   list  some  options  are  listed  as  style-option/opposite-style-option.   The
              opposite-style-option for entries that have them describes the fvwm default behavior  and  can  be
              used if you want to change the fvwm default behavior.

              Focus policy
                     ClickToFocus  instructs  fvwm  to  give  the  focus to a window when it is clicked in.  The
                     default MouseFocus (or its alias FocusFollowsMouse) tells fvwm to give a window  the  focus
                     as  soon  as  the  pointer  enters the window, and take it away when the pointer leaves the
                     window.  SloppyFocus is similar, but doesn't give up the focus if the  pointer  leaves  the
                     window  to pass over the root window or a ClickToFocus window (unless you click on it, that
                     is), which makes it possible to move the mouse out of the  way  without  losing  focus.   A
                     window with the style NeverFocus never receives the focus.  This is useful for modules like
                     FvwmButtons.   for  example.   Note:  Once  any  of  the  "FP..." styles has been used, the
                     defaults that come with the basic focus policies are not restored when the latter are  used
                     again.   For  example, once !FPGrabFocus has been used, using ClickToFocus does not restore
                     FPGrabFocus.

                     The focus model can be augmented with several additional options.  In fvwm-2.5.3 and later,
                     there are a large number of advanced options beginning with "FP" or "!FP".   These  options
                     shall  replace  the  older options one day and are described first.  Using any of these new
                     options may limit compatibility with older releases.  In general,  options  beginning  with
                     "FP" turn a feature on, while those beginning with "!FP" turn it off.

              Focusing the window
                     With FPEnterToFocus, when the pointer enters a window it receives focus.

                     With FPLeaveToUnfocus a window loses focus when the pointer leaves it.

                     With  FPClickToFocus,  FPClickDecorToFocus  or  FPClickIconToFocus, a window receives focus
                     when the inside of the window or the decorations or its icon is clicked.

                     The FPFocusByProgram style allows windows to take the focus themselves.

                     The !FPFocusByFunction style forbids that a window receives the focus  via  the  Focus  and
                     FlipFocus commands.

                     The  FPFocusByFunctionWarpPointer  style  controls  if  the pointer is warped to a selected
                     window when the Focus command is used.

                     FPLenient allows focus on windows that do not want it, like FvwmPager or xclock.

                     The FPFocusClickButtons style takes a list of mouse buttons that can be clicked to focus or
                     raise a window when the appropriate style is used.  The default is to use the  first  three
                     buttons ("123").

                     The  FPFocusClickModifiers  style  takes a list of modifier keys just like the Key command.
                     The exact combination of modifier keys must be pressed for the click to focus  or  raise  a
                     window to work.  The default is to use no modifiers ("N").

                     With the FPPassFocusClick style, the click that was used to focus a window is passed to the
                     application.

                     With  the  FPAllowFocusClickFunction  style,  the click that was used to focus a window can
                     also trigger a normal action that was bound to the window with the Mouse command).

                     If the FPIgnoreFocusClickMotion style is used, clicking in a window and then  dragging  the
                     pointer  with  the  button  held  down  does  not  count  as the click to focus the window.
                     Instead, the application processes these events normally.  This is useful to select text in
                     a terminal window with the mouse without raising the window.  However,  mouse  bindings  on
                     the  client  window  are  not  guaranteed  to work anymore (see Mouse command).  This style
                     forces the initial click to be passed to the application.  The distance  that  the  pointer
                     must be moved to trigger this is controlled by the MoveThreshold command.

                     The   FPSortWindowlistByFocus  and  !FPSortWindowlistByFocus  styles  control  whether  the
                     internal window list is sorted in the order the windows were focused or in the  order  they
                     were created.  The latter is the default for ClickToFocus and SloppyFocus.

                     Clicking the window to raise

                     The  styles  FPClickRaisesFocused,  FPClickDecorRaisesFocused  and FPClickIconRaisesFocused
                     allow one to raise the window when the interior or the  decorations  or  the  icon  of  the
                     window is clicked while the window is already focused.

                     The        styles       FPClickRaisesUnfocused,       FPClickDecorRaisesUnfocused       and
                     FPClickIconRaisesUnfocused allow  one  to  raise  the  window  when  the  interior  or  the
                     decorations or the icon of the window is clicked while the window is not yet focused.

                     With  the  FPPassRaiseClick style, the click that was used to raise the window is passed to
                     the application.

                     With the FPAllowRaiseClickFunction style, the click that was used to raise the  window  can
                     also trigger a normal action that was bound to the window with the Mouse command.

                     If  the  FPIgnoreRaiseClickMotion style is used, clicking in a window and then dragging the
                     pointer with the button held down does  not  count  as  the  click  to  raise  the  window.
                     Instead, the application processes these events normally.  This is useful to select text in
                     a  terminal  window  with the mouse without raising the window.  However, mouse bindings on
                     the client window are not guaranteed to work anymore (see Mouse command.   Note  that  this
                     style  forces  that  the initial click is passed to the application.  The distance that the
                     pointer must be moved to trigger this is controlled by the MoveThreshold command.

                     Grabbing the focus when a new window is created

                     New normal  or  transient  windows  with  the  FPGrabFocus  or  FPGrabFocusTransient  style
                     automatically  receive  the  focus  when  they are created.  FPGrabFocus is the default for
                     windows with the ClickToFocus style.  Note that even if  these  styles  are  disabled,  the
                     application may take the focus itself.  Fvwm can not prevent this.

                     The  OverrideGrabFocus style instructs fvwm to never take away the focus from such a window
                     via the GrabFocus or GrabFocusTransient styles.  This can be useful if  you  like  to  have
                     transient  windows  receive  the  focus  immediately, for example in a web browser, but not
                     while you are working in a terminal window or a text processor.

                     The above three styles  are  accompanied  by  FPReleaseFocus,  FPReleaseFocusTransient  and
                     FPOverrideReleaseFocus.   These control if the focus is returned to another window when the
                     window is closed.  Otherwise no window or the window under the pointer receives the focus.

                     ClickToFocusPassesClickOff and ClickToFocusPassesClick controls whether a  mouse  click  to
                     focus    a    window    is    sent    to    the    application    or    not.     Similarly,
                     ClickToFocusRaisesOff/MouseFocusClickRaisesOff and ClickToFocusRaises/MouseFocusClickRaises
                     control if the window is raised (but depending on the focus model).

                     Note: in fvwm versions prior to 2.5.3, the "Click..." options applied only to windows  with
                     ClickToFocus while the "Mouse..." options applied to windows with a different focus policy.
                     This is no longer the case.

                     The old GrabFocus style is equivalent to using FPGrabFocus + FPReleaseFocus.

                     The   old   GrabFocusTransient   style   is  equivalent  to  using  FPGrabFocusTransient  +
                     FPReleaseFocusTransient.

                     Lenience is equivalent to the new style FPLenient.

              Window title
                     The Title and !Title options determine if the window has a title-bar or  not.   By  default
                     all windows have a title-bar.  NoTitle is equivalent to !Title but is deprecated.

                     Windows  with  the TitleAtBottom, TitleAtLeft or TitleAtRight style have a title-bar below,
                     to the left or to the right of the window instead of above as usual.  The TitleAtTop  style
                     restores  the default placement.  Even if the window has the !Title style set, this affects
                     the WindowShade command.  Please check the WindowShade  command  for  interactions  between
                     that  command  and  these  styles.   Titles  on  the  left or right side of the windows are
                     augmented by the following styles:

                     Normally, the text in titles on the left side of a window is rotated counterclockwise by 90
                     degrees from the normal upright position and 90 degrees clockwise for titles on  the  right
                     side.   It  can  also  be  rotated  in  the  opposite directions with LeftTitleRotatedCW if
                     TitleAtLeft is used, and with RightTitleRotatedCCW if TitleAtRight is used.   The  defaults
                     can be restored with LeftTitleRotatedCCW and RightTitleRotatedCW.  A normal horizontal text
                     may   be   rotated   as   well  with  TopTitleRotated  if  TitleAtTop  is  used,  and  with
                     BottomTitleRotated  if  TitleAtBottom  is  used.   The  defaults  can  be   restored   with
                     TopTitleNotRotated and BottomTitleNotRotated.

                     By  default  the  title  bar  decoration  defined  using  the TitleStyle command is rotated
                     following the title text rotation (see the previous paragraph).  This can  be  disabled  by
                     using the !UseTitleDecorRotation style.  UseTitleDecorRotation reverts back to the default.

                     With  the  StippledTitle  style,  titles  are  drawn  with  the same effect that is usually
                     reserved for  windows  with  the  Sticky,  StickyAcrossPages  or  StickyAcrossDesks  style.
                     !StippledTitle   reverts   back  to  normal  titles.   StippledTitleOff  is  equivalent  to
                     !StippledTitle but is deprecated.

                     Color takes two arguments.  The first is the window-label text color and the second is  the
                     window decorations normal background color.  The two colors are separated with a slash.  If
                     the use of a slash causes problems then the separate ForeColor and BackColor options can be
                     used.

                     Colorset  takes  the  colorset  number as its sole argument and overrides the colors set by
                     Color.  Instead, the corresponding colors from the given colorset are used.  Note that  all
                     other  features  of  a  colorset  are  not  used.  Use the Colorset decoration style in the
                     TitleStyle and ButtonStyle command for that.  To stop  using  the  colorset,  the  colorset
                     number is omitted.

                     The HilightFore, HilightBack and HilightColorset style options work exactly like ForeColor,
                     BackColor and Colorset but are used only if the window has the focus.  These styles replace
                     the old commands HilightColor and HilightColorset.

                     BorderColorset  takes the colorset number as its sole argument and overrides the colors set
                     by Color or Colorset.  for the window border.  To stop using a colorset,  the  argument  is
                     omitted.

                     The  HilightBorderColorset  style option works similarly to BorderColorset but is used when
                     the window has the focus.

                     !IconTitle disables displaying icon labels while the opposite style IconTitle enables  icon
                     labels (default behaviour).  NoIconTitle is equivalent to !IconTitle but is deprecated.

                     IconTitleColorset  takes  the colorset number as its sole argument and overrides the colors
                     set by Color or Colorset.  To stop using this colorset, the argument is omitted.

                     HilightIconTitleColorset takes the colorset number as its sole argument and  overrides  the
                     colors  set  by HilightColor or HilightColorset.  To stop using this colorset, the argument
                     is omitted.

                     IconBackgroundColorset takes the colorset number as its sole argument and uses it to set  a
                     background  for  the  icon  picture.   By  default  the  icon  picture  is not drawn onto a
                     background image.  To restore the default, the argument is omitted.

                     IconTitleRelief takes one numeric argument that may be  between  -50  and  +50  pixels  and
                     defines  the  thickness of the 3D relief drawn around the icon title.  With negative values
                     the icon title gets a pressed in look.  The default is 2 and it is restored if the argument
                     is omitted.

                     IconBackgroundRelief takes one numeric argument that may be between -50 and +50 pixels  and
                     defines  the  thickness of the 3D relief drawn around the icon picture background (if any).
                     With negative values the icon background gets a pressed in look.  The default is 2  and  it
                     is restored if the argument is omitted.

                     IconBackgroundPadding  takes  one  numeric argument that may be between 0 and 50 pixels and
                     defines the amount of free space between the relief of the icon background picture (if any)
                     and the icon picture.  The default is 2 and it is restored if the argument is omitted.

                     The Font and IconFont options take the name of a font as their sole argument.  This font is
                     used in the window or icon title.  By default the font given in the DefaultFont command  is
                     used.   To  revert  back  to  the  default, use the style without the name argument.  These
                     styles replace the older WindowFont and IconFont commands.

                     The deprecated IndexedWindowName style causes fvwm to use window titles in the form

                         name (i)

                     where name is the exact window name and i is an integer which represents the  i  th  window
                     with name as window name.  This has been replaced with:

                         TitleFormat %n (%t)

                     ExactWindowName  restores the default which is to use the exact window name.  Deprecated in
                     favour of:

                             TitleFormat %n

                     IndexedIconName and ExactIconName work the same as  IndexedWindowName  and  ExactWindowName
                     styles but for the icon titles.  Both are deprecated in favour of:

                         IconTitleFormat %n (%t)
                         IconTitleFormat %n

                     TitleFormat  describes  what  the  visible  name  of  a  window  should look like, with the
                     following placeholders being valid:

                     %n
                         Insert the window's name.

                     %i
                         Insert the window's icon name.

                     %c
                         Insert the window's class name.

                     %r
                         Insert the window's resource name.

                     %t
                         Insert the window count.

                     %I
                         Insert the window ID.

                     %%
                         Insert a literal '%' character.

                     Any amount of whitespace may be used, along with other characters to make up the string  --
                     but a valid TitleFormat string must contain at least one of the placeholders mentioned.  No
                     quote  stripping  is  performed  on  the  string,  so  for example the following is printed
                     verbatim:

                             TitleFormat " %n " -> [%t] ->      [%c]

                     Note: It's perfectly possible to use a TitleFormat which  can  result  in  wiping  out  the
                     visible title altogether.  For example:

                             TitleFormat %z

                     Simply  because the placeholder '%z' isn't supported.  This is not a bug but rather a facet
                     of how the formatting parser works.

                     IconTitleFormat describes what the visible icon name of a window should look like, with the
                     options being the same as TitleFormat.

              Title buttons
                     Button and !Button take a numeric argument which is the  number  of  the  title-bar  button
                     which is to be shown or omitted.  NoButton is equivalent to !Button but is deprecated.

                     MwmButtons makes the Maximize button look pressed-in when the window is maximized.  See the
                     MwmDecorMax  flag in ButtonStyle for more information.  To switch this style off again, use
                     the FvwmButtons style.

              Borders
                     !Borders suppresses the window border (but not the title) completely.   The  Borders  style
                     enables  them  again.   Without  borders,  all  other  styles  affecting window borders are
                     meaningless.

                     MwmBorder makes the 3D bevel more closely match Mwm's.  FvwmBorder turns off  the  previous
                     option.

                     With the !Handles style, the window does not get the handles in the window corners that are
                     commonly  used  to resize it.  With !Handles, the width from the BorderWidth style is used.
                     By default, or if Handles is specified, the width  from  the  HandleWidth  style  is  used.
                     NoHandles is equivalent to !Handles but is deprecated.

                     HandleWidth  takes  a numeric argument which is the width of the border to place the window
                     if it does have  resize-handles.   Using  HandleWidth  without  an  argument  restores  the
                     default.

                     BorderWidth  takes  a numeric argument which is the width of the border to place the window
                     if it does not have resize-handles.  It is used only if the  !Handles  style  is  specified
                     too.  Using BorderWidth without an argument restores the default.

                     DepressableBorder  makes  the  border  parts of the window decoration look sunken in when a
                     button is pressed over them.  This can be disabled again with the FirmBorder style.

              Icons, shading, maximizing, movement, resizing
                     Icon takes an (optional) unquoted string argument which is the icon  bitmap  or  pixmap  to
                     use.   Icons  specified  this  way  override pixmap icons, but not icon windows or the ewmh
                     icon, provided by the client in the application (with the WM_HINTS  property  or  with  the
                     ewmh  _NET_WM_ICON  property).  The IconOverride style changes the behavior to override any
                     client-provided icons; the NoIconOverride style changes the behavior to  not  override  any
                     client-provided   icons;  the  default  overriding  behavior  can  be  activated  with  the
                     NoActiveIconOverride style.  With this style, fvwm uses application provided icons  if  the
                     icon is changed but uses the icon provided in the configuration file until then.

                     There is one exception to these rules, namely

                         Style * Icon unknown.xpm

                     doesn't  force the unknown.xpm icon on every window, it just sets the default icon like the
                     DefaultIcon command.  If you really want all windows to have the same icon, you can use

                         Style ** Icon unknown.xpm

                     If the NoIcon attribute is set then the specified  window  simply  disappears  when  it  is
                     iconified.  The window can be recovered through the window-list.  If Icon is set without an
                     argument  then  the NoIcon attribute is cleared but no icon is specified.  An example which
                     allows only the FvwmPager module icon to exist:

                         Style * NoIcon
                         Style FvwmPager Icon

                     IconBox takes no argument, four numeric arguments (plus optionally a screen specification),
                     an X11 geometry string or the string "none":

                         IconBox [screen scr-spec] l t r b

                     or

                         IconBox geometry

                     Where l is the left coordinate, t is the top,  r  is  right  and  b  is  bottom.   Negative
                     coordinates  indicate  distance  from  the  right  or  bottom  of the screen.  If the first
                     argument is the word screen, the scr-spec argument specifies the Xinerama screen  on  which
                     the  IconBox is defined.  It can be the usual screen Xinerama specification, 'p', ´c', 'g',
                     a screen number or the additional 'w' for the screen where the window  center  is  located.
                     This  is  only  useful with multiple Xinerama screens.  The "l t r b" specification is more
                     flexible than an X11 geometry.  For example:

                         IconBox -80 240 -1 -1

                     defines a box that is 80 pixels wide from the right edge, 240 pixels down from the top, and
                     continues to the bottom of the screen.

                     Perhaps it is easier to use is an X11 geometry string though:

                         IconBox 1000x70-1-1

                     places an 1000 by 70 pixel icon box on the bottom of the screen starting in the lower right
                     hand corner of the screen.  One way to figure out a geometry like this is to use  a  window
                     that  resizes  in  pixel  increments, for example, xv.  Then resize and place the xv window
                     where you want the iconbox.  Then use FvwmIdent to read the windows geometry.  The icon box
                     is a region of the screen where fvwm attempts to put icons for any matching window, as long
                     as they do not overlap other icons.  Multiple icon boxes can be defined as overflow  areas.
                     When  the  first  icon  box  is full, the second one is filled.  All the icon boxes for one
                     style must be defined in one Style command.  For example:

                         Style * IconBox -80 240 -1 -1, \
                                 IconBox 1000x70-1-1

                     A Style command with the IconBox option replaces any icon box defined previously by another
                     Style command for the same style.  That's why the backslash  in  the  previous  example  is
                     required.

                     Note:  The  geometry for the icon box command takes the additional screen specifier "@w" in
                     case a Xinerama setup is used.  This designates the  screen  where  the  window  center  is
                     located.  The additional screen specifier is not allowed anywhere else.

                     If  you  never  define an icon box, or you fill all the icon boxes, fvwm has a default icon
                     box that covers the screen, it fills top to bottom, then left to right, and  has  an  80x80
                     pixel  grid.  To disable all but the default icon box you can use IconBox without arguments
                     in a separate Style command.  To disable all icon boxes including the default icon box, the
                     argument "none" can be specified.

                     Hint: You can auto arrange your icons in the icon box with a simple fvwm function.  Put the
                     "DeiconifyAndRearrange" function below in your configuration file:

                         AddToFunc DeiconifyAndRearrange
                          + C Iconify off
                          + C All (CurrentPage, Iconic) PlaceAgain Icon

                     And then replace all places where you call the Iconify command to de-iconify an icon with a
                     call to the new function.  For example replace

                         AddToFunc IconFunc
                          + C Iconify off
                          + M Raise
                          + M Move
                          + D Iconify off

                         Mouse 1 I A Iconify off

                     with

                         AddToFunc IconFunc
                          + C DeiconifyAndRearrange
                          + M Raise
                          + M Move
                          + D DeiconifyAndRearrange

                         Mouse 1 I A DeiconifyAndRearrange

                     IconGrid takes 2 numeric arguments greater than zero.

                         IconGrid x y

                     Icons are placed in an icon box by stepping through the icon box using the x and  y  values
                     for the icon grid, looking for a free space.  The default grid is 3 by 3 pixels which gives
                     a  tightly packed appearance.  To get a more regular appearance use a grid larger than your
                     largest icon.  Use the IconSize argument to clip or stretch an icon to a maximum size.   An
                     IconGrid definition must follow the IconBox definition that it applies to:

                         Style * IconBox -80x240-1-1, IconGrid 90 90

                     IconFill takes 2 arguments.

                         IconFill Bottom Right

                     Icons  are  placed in an icon box by stepping through the icon box using these arguments to
                     control the direction the box is filled in.  By default the direction  is  left  to  right,
                     then top to bottom.  This would be expressed as:

                         IconFill left top

                     To  fill  an  icon  box  in columns instead of rows, specify the vertical direction (top or
                     bottom) first.  The directions can be abbreviated or spelled out as  follows:  "t",  "top",
                     "b", "bot", "bottom", "l", "lft", "left", "r", "rgt", "right".  An IconFill definition must
                     follow the IconBox definition that it applies to:

                         Style * IconBox -80x240-1-1, IconFill b r

                     IconSize   sets   limits   on   the   size  of  an  icon  image.   Both  user-provided  and
                     application-provided icon images are affected.

                         IconSize [ width height [ maxwidth maxheight ] ]

                     All arguments are measured in pixels.  When all four  arguments  are  passed  to  IconSize,
                     width  and  height  represent  the  minimum  size  of  an  icon, and maxwidth and maxheight
                     represent the maximum size of an icon.  Icon images that are smaller than the minimum  size
                     are padded.  Icon images that are bigger than the maximum size are clipped.

                     If  only two arguments are passed to IconSize, width and height represent the absolute size
                     of an icon.  Icons covered by this style are padded or clipped to achieve the given size.

                     If no arguments are specified, the default  values  are  used  for  each  dimension.   This
                     effectively places no limits on the size of an icon.

                     The value of "-1" can be used in place of any of the arguments to specify the default value
                     for that dimension.

                     In addition to the numeric arguments, 1 additional argument can be "Stretched", "Adjusted",
                     or "Shrunk".

                     Note that module provided icon managers are not affected by this style.

              MiniIcon  specifies a pixmap to use as the miniature icon for the window.  This miniature icon can
              be drawn in a title-bar button (see  ButtonStyle),  and  can  be  used  by  various  fvwm  modules
              (FvwmIconMan and FvwmPager).  It takes the name of a pixmap as an argument.

              WindowShadeShrinks and WindowShadeScrolls control if the contents of a window that is being shaded
              with  the WindowShade command are scrolled (default) or if they stay in place.  The shrinking mode
              is a bit faster

              The WindowShadeSteps option selects the number of steps for animation when shading a  window  with
              WindowShade.   It  takes one number as its argument.  If the number has a trailing 'p' it sets the
              number of pixels to use as the step size instead of a fixed  number  of  steps.   0  disables  the
              animation.  This happens too if the argument is omitted or invalid.

              The  WindowShade  command  has two modes of operation: busy and lazy shading.  Busy shading can be
              50% slower than lazy shading, but the latter can look strange under some conditions, for  example,
              if  the  window  borders,  buttons  or the title are filled with a tiled pixmap.  Also, the window
              handles are not drawn in lazy mode and the border relief may only be drawn partially right  before
              the  window  reaches  the shaded state or tight after leaves the unshaded state.  By default, fvwm
              uses lazy mode if there are no bad visual effects (not counting the window handles) and busy  mode
              otherwise.  Use the WindowShadeAlwaysLazy or WindowShadeBusy to force using the lazy or busy mode.
              The default setting is restored with WindowShadeLazy.

              ResizeOpaque  instructs  fvwm  to  resize  the  corresponding  windows with their contents visible
              instead of using an outline.  Since this causes the application to redraw  frequently  it  can  be
              quite  slow  and  make  the  window  flicker  excessively, depending on the amount of graphics the
              application redraws.  The ResizeOutline style (default)  negates  the  ResizeOpaque  style.   Many
              applications  do  not  like their windows being resized opaque, e.g. XEmacs, Netscape or terminals
              with a pixmap background.  If you do not like the result, do not use the  ResizeOpaque  style  for
              these  windows.   To exempt certain windows from opaque resizing you could use these lines in your
              configuration file:

                  Style * ResizeOpaque
                  Style rxvt ResizeOutline
                  Style emacs ResizeOutline

              Sticky makes the window sticky, i.e. it is always  visible  on  each  page  and  each  desk.   The
              opposite style, Slippery reverts back to the default.

              StickyIcon  makes  the  window  sticky  when  it's  iconified.   It de-iconifies on top the active
              desktop.  SlipperyIcon reverts back to the default.

              StickyAcrossPages and StickyAcrossPagesIcon work like Sticky and StickyIcon, but stick the  window
              only across pages, not desks while StickyAcrossDesks and StickyAcrossDesksIcon works the other way
              round.

              Windows  that  have  been  marked  as  Sticky  or StickyAcrossDesks or StickyAcrossPages will have
              stipples drawn on the titlebar.  This can be negated with  the  !StickyStippledTitle  style.   The
              style StickyStippledTitle puts back the stipples where that window has also been marked as Sticky.
              Note  that this is the default style for Sticky windows.  Sticky icons will have stipples drawn on
              the icon title.  This can be disabled in the same way with the !StickyStippledIconTitle style.

              Windows with the StartIconic style are shown as icons  initially.   Note  that  some  applications
              counteract  that by deiconifying themselves.  The default is to not iconify windows and can be set
              with the StartNormal style.

              StickyIcon makes the window sticky when  it's  iconified.   It  de-iconifies  on  top  the  active
              desktop.  SlipperyIcon reverts back to the default.

              StickyIconPage  works  like  StickyIcon,  but  sticks  the icon only across pages, not desks while
              StickyIconDesk works the other way round.

              StippledIconTitle works like StippledTitle in that it draws stipples on the titles  of  icons  but
              doesn't make the icon sticky.

              IgnoreRestack  makes  fvwm  ignore  attempts  of  clients to raise or lower their own windows.  By
              default, the opposite style, AllowRestack is active.

              FixedPosition and FixedUSPosition make fvwm ignore attempts of the user to move the window.  It is
              still possible to move the window by resizing it.  To allow the user  to  move  windows,  use  the
              VariablePosition or VariableUSPosition style.

              FixedSize  and  FixedUSSize  make fvwm ignore attempts of the user to resize the window.  To allow
              the user to resize windows, use the VariableSize or VariableUSSize style.

              FixedPPosition and FixedPSize make fvwm ignore attempts of the  program  to  move  or  resize  its
              windows.   To allow this kind of actions, use the VariablePPosition or VariablePSize style.  These
              styles may sometimes affect the initial placement and dimensions of new windows (depending on  the
              application).   If  windows  are  created  at  strange places, try either the VariablePPosition or
              !UsePPosition styles.  The FixedPSize style may screw up window dimensions for some  applications.
              Do Not use this style in this case.

              MoveByProgramMethod  affects  how  fvwm reacts to requests by the application to move its windows.
              By default, fvwm tries to detect which method to use, but it sometimes detects the  wrong  method.
              You  may  come across a window that travels across the screen by a few pixels when the application
              resizes it, moves to a screen border with the frame decorations off  screen,  that  remembers  its
              position  for  the next time it starts but appears in a slighly shifted position, or that attepmts
              to become full screen but has the.  Try out both options,  UseGravity  and  IgnoreGravity  on  the
              window (and that window only) and see if that helps.  By default, fvwm uses the AutoDetect method.
              Once  the  method  was  detected,  it  is never changed again.  As long as fvwm can not detect the
              proper method, it uses IgnoreGravity.  To force fvwm to retry the detection, use one of the  other
              two options first and then use AutoDetect again.

              Note:  This  option was introduced to alleviate a problem with the ICCCM specification.  The ICCCM
              clearly states that the UseGravity option should be used, but traditionally  applications  ignored
              this rule.

              Closable  enables the functions Close, Delete and Destroy to be performed on the windows.  This is
              on by default.  The opposite, !Closable, inhibits the window to be closed.

              Iconifiable enables the function Iconify to be performed on the windows.  This is on  by  default.
              The opposite, !Iconifiable, inhibits the window from being iconified.

              Maximizable  enables the function Maximize to be performed on the windows.  This is on by default.
              The opposite, !Maximizable, inhibits the window from being maximized.

              AllowMaximizeFixedSize enables the function Maximize to be  performed  on  windows  that  are  not
              resizable, unless maximization has been disabled either using the style !Maximizable or through WM
              hints.   This  is on by default.  The opposite, !AllowMaximizeFixedSize, inhibits all windows that
              are not resizable from being maximized.

              ResizeHintOverride instructs fvwm to ignore the program supplied minimum and maximum size as  well
              as  the  resize step size (the character size in many applications).  This can be handy for broken
              applications that refuse to be resized.  Do not use it  if  you  do  not  need  it.   The  default
              (opposite) style is NoResizeOverride.

              MinWindowSize  [  width  [ p ] height [ p ] ] Tells fvwm the minimum width and height of a window.
              The values are the percentage of the total screen area.  If the letter 'p' is appended  to  either
              of the values, the numbers are interpreted as pixels.  This command is useful for certain versions
              of  xemacs  which freak out if their windows become too small.  If you omit he parameters or their
              values are invalid, both limits are set to 0 pixels (which is the default value).

              MaxWindowSize [ width [ p ] height [ p ] ] Tells fvwm the maximum width and height  of  a  window.
              The  values  are the percentage of the total screen area.  If the letter 'p' is appended to either
              of the values, the numbers are interpreted as pixels.  This  command  is  useful  to  force  large
              application  windows  to  be fully visible.  Neither height nor width may be less than 100 pixels.
              If you omit the parameters or their values are invalid, both limits are set to 32767 pixels (which
              is the default).

              With IconifyWindowGroups all windows in the same window group are  iconified  and  deiconified  at
              once  when any window in the group is (de)iconified.  The default is IconifyWindowGroupsOff, which
              disables this behavior.  Although a number of applications use the window group hint, it is rarely
              used in a proper way, so it  is  probably  best  to  use  IconifyWindowGroups  only  for  selected
              applications.

              The  option  SnapAttraction affects interactive window movement: If during an interactive move the
              window or icon comes within proximity pixels of another the window or icon, it is  moved  to  make
              the  borders  adjoin.   The  default  of  0  means that no snapping happens.  Calling this command
              without arguments turns off snap attraction and restores the default behavior.  Please refer  also
              to the SnapGrid command.

              The  second  argument  determined  is optional and may be set to one of the five following values:
              With All both icons and windows snap to other windows and other icons.  SameType lets windows snap
              only to windows, and icons snap only to icons.  With Windows windows snap only to  other  windows.
              Similarly  with  Icons  icons  snap only to other icons.  With None no snapping takes place.  This
              option can be useful in conjunction with the following argument if you only want to  snap  against
              the screen edges.  The default behavior is All.

              The third and last optional argument may be set to one of the four following values:

              •   With Screen the already snapping icons or windows, which is controlled by the second argument,
                  will snap now also to the screen edges.

              •   ScreenWindows snaps only windows to the screen edges.

              •   ScreenIcons snaps only icons to the screen edges.

              •   ScreenAll snaps windows and icons to the screen edges.

              The  option SnapGrid defines an invisible grid on the screen.  During an interactive move a window
              or icon is positioned such that its location (top left corner) is coincident with the nearest grid
              point.  The default x-grid-size and y-grid-size setting are both 1, which is effectively  no  grid
              all.

              An  interactive move with both SnapGrid and SnapAttraction results in the window being moved to be
              adjacent to the nearest window border (if within snap proximity) or  grid  position.   The  window
              moves the shortest distance possible to satisfy both SnapGrid and SnapAttraction.  Note that the x
              and y coordinates are not coupled.  For example, a window may snap to another window on the x axis
              while  snapping  to a grid point on the y axis.  Using this style without arguments reinstates the
              default settings.

              The styles EdgeMoveDelay and EdgeResizeDelay tells how hard it should be  to  change  the  desktop
              viewport by moving or resizing a window over the edge of the screen.  The parameter tells how many
              milliseconds  the  pointer  must  spend  on  the  screen edge before fvwm moves the viewport.  The
              command EdgeScroll determines how far the viewport is scrolled.  If -1 is given as the delay, page
              flipping is disabled completely.  The defaults are no delay for moving (0)  and  no  flipping  for
              resizing (-1).  Using these styles without any argument restores the default settings.  Note that,
              with

                  EdgeScroll 0 0

              it  is  still  possible to move or resize windows across the edge of the current screen.  See also
              EdgeThickness.

              The option EdgeMoveResistance makes it easier to place a window directly adjacent to the  screen's
              or  xinerama screen's border.  It takes one or two parameters.  The first parameter tells how many
              pixels over the edge of the screen a window's edge must move before it  actually  moves  partially
              off  the  screen.   The  optional  second parameter does the same as the first, but for individual
              Xinerama screens.  If omitted, the value of the first  parameter  is  assumed  for  this  type  of
              movement.  Set the second parameter to 0 to zero to ignore individual xinerama screen edges.  Note
              that  the  center  of  the  window  being moved determines the xinerama screen on which the window
              should  be  kept.   Both  values  are  0  by  default.   To  restore  the  defaults,  the   option
              EdgeMoveResistance can be used without any parameters.

              The  option InitialMapCommand allows for any valid fvwm command or function to run when the window
              is initially mapped by fvwm.  Example:

                  Style MyWindow StartsOnPage 0 0, InitialMapCommand Iconify

              This would hence place the window  called  MyWindow  on  page  0  0  for  the  current  desk,  and
              immediately run the Iconify command on that window.

              Note that should InitialMapCommand be used as a global option for all windows, but there is a need
              that some windows should not have this command applied, then an action of Nop can be used on those
              windows, as in the following example:

                  Style * InitialMapCommand Iconify
                  Style XTeddy InitialMapCommand Nop

       Window Manager placement
              Applications  can  place windows at a particular spot on the screen either by window manager hints
              or a geometry specification.  When they do neither, then the window manager steps  in  to  find  a
              place  for  the  window.   Fvwm  knows  several  ways to deal with this situation.  The default is
              TileCascadePlacement.

              PositionPlacement [Center|UnderMouse|move-arguments] When used without an  argument,  new  windows
              are placed in the top left corner of the display.  With the argument Center, all new window appear
              at  the  center  of  the screen, and with UnderMouse, windows are centered under the mouse pointer
              where possible.  If the window is unable to fit on the screen because the pointer is at  the  edge
              of the screen, then the window is forced on-screen using this option.  If any other move-arguments
              are  given,  they  are  interpreted  exactly  as  the  Move  command does (with the exception that
              references to the current window position do not work as the window has not been placed yet).

              CascadePlacement automatically place new windows in a cascading fashion.

              TileCascadePlacement automatically places new windows in a smart location - a  location  in  which
              they  do  not  overlap  any  other  windows  on  the  screen.   If  no  such position can be found
              CascadePlacement is used as a fall-back method.

              TileManualPlacement This is the same as TileCascadePlacement,  but  uses  ManualPlacement  as  the
              fall-back method.

              MinOverlapPlacement  automatically  places new windows in a location in which the overlapping area
              in pixels of other windows is  minimized.   By  default  this  placement  policy  tries  to  avoid
              overlapping   icons   and   windows   on   higher   layers.   This  can  be  configured  with  the
              MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.

              MinOverlapPercentPlacement is similar to MinOverlapPlacement but tries to minimize the  overlapped
              percentages  of  other  windows  instead  of the overlapped area in pixels.  This placement policy
              tries to avoid covering other windows completely and tries even harder not to cover small windows.
              This     can      be      configured      with      the      MinOverlapPlacementPenalties      and
              MinOverlapPercentPlacementPenalties styles.

              MinOverlapPlacementPenalties takes at most 6 positive or null decimal arguments:

                  normal ontop icon sticky below strut

              if trailing arguments are missing the default is used which is:

                  1 5 10 1 0.05 50

              To  reset  this  style  to  the  default  values, prefix it with a '!'.  This style configures the
              MinOverlapPlacement and MinOverlapPercentPlacement placement policy.  The  normal  factor  affects
              normal  windows,  the  ontop  factor  affects  windows  with a greater layer than the window being
              placed, the icon factor affects icons, the sticky factor affects sticky windows, the below  factor
              affects  windows  with  a smaller layer than the window being placed, the strut factor affects the
              complement of the EWMH working area if the window being placed has the EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea
              style and windows with an EWMH strut hint (i.e., a "please do not cover me" hint)  if  the  window
              being placed has the EWMHPlacementUseDynamicWorkingArea style.  These factors represent the amount
              of  area  that  these types of windows (or area) are counted as, when a new window is placed.  For
              example, by default the area of ontop windows is counted 5 times as much as  normal  windows.   So
              MinOverlapPlacement  and  MinOverlapPercentPlacement covers 5 times as much area of another window
              before it will cover an ontop window.  To treat ontop windows the same as other windows, set  this
              to  1.  To really, really avoid putting windows under ontop windows, set this to a high value, say
              1000.  This style affects the window already mapped and not the window which is currently  placed.
              There  is  one  exception  to  this  rule:  in  the  case  of  the  window  being  placed  has the
              EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea style the strut factor affects the placed window.

              MinOverlapPercentPlacementPenalties takes at most 4 positive or null integer arguments:

                  cover_100 cover_95 cover_85 cover_75

              if trailing arguments are missing the defaults are used which are:

                  12 6 4 1

              To reset this style to the default  values,  prefix  it  with  a  '!'.   This  style  affects  the
              MinOverlapPercentPlacement  placement  policy  and  is similar to the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties
              style.  The cover_xx factor is used when the window being placed covers at least xx percent of the
              window.  This factor is added to the factor determined by the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.

              ManualPlacement (aka active placement).  The user is required to place every new window  manually.
              The  window  only shows as a rubber band until a place is selected manually.  The window is placed
              when a mouse button or any key except Escape is pressed.  Escape  aborts  manual  placement  which
              places  the  window in the top left corner of the screen.  If mouse button 2 is pressed during the
              initial placement of a window (respectively Shift and mouse button 1 in  case  Mwm  emulation  has
              been enabled with the Emulate command), the user is asked to resize the window too.

              It  is  possible  to  define buttons usable to place windows with the Move command and the special
              context 'P' for placement (see Move command).  However, you can't redefine the way to also  resize
              the  window other than the way it is affected by the Emulate command.  The button used for placing
              the window can be checked with the PlacedByButton condition (see Current command).

              Example:

                  Style * ManualPlacement

                  *FvwmEvent: PassID
                  *FvwmEvent: add_window GrowDownFunc
                  AddToFunc StartFunction
                  + I FvwmEvent

                  AddToFunc GrowDownFunc
                  + I windowid $0 (PlacedByButton 3) \
                    Resize bottomright keep -0p

              Now, whenever a window is created and the user presses button 3 to finish initial  placement,  the
              window is automatically enlarged until it hits the bottom screen border.

              Old  placement  styles  DumbPlacement  /  SmartPlacement  /  SmartPlacementOff,  CleverPlacement /
              CleverPlacementOff,  ActivePlacement  /  RandomPlacement,   ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPage   /
              ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPageOff,   GlobalOpts   SmartPlacementIsReallySmart   /   GlobalOpts
              SmartPlacementIsNormal are still supported but will be removed in the future.   The  old  and  new
              styles can be translated according to the following table:

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsReallySmart
                  Style * SmartPlacement
                  -->
                  Style * SmartPlacement, CleverPlacement

                  GlobalOpts SmartPlacementIsNormal
                  Style * SmartPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * SmartPlacement, CleverPlacementOff

                  Style * DumbPlacement, RandomPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * CascadePlacement

                  Style * DumbPlacement, ActivePlacement
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, \
                  RandomPlacement, CleverPlacementOff
                    -->
                  Style * TileCascadePlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, \
                  ActivePlacement, CleverPlacementOff
                    -->
                  Style * TileManualPlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, CleverPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * MinOverlapPlacement

                  Style * SmartPlacement, \
                  ActivePlacement, CleverPlacement
                    -->
                  Style * MinOverlapPercentPlacement

                  Style * ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPage
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementsHonorsStartsOnPage

                  Style * ActivePlacementsHonorsStartsOnPageOff
                    -->
                  Style * ManualPlacementsHonorsStartsOnPageOff

       Placement policy options and window stacking
              !UsePPosition instructs fvwm to ignore the program specified position (PPosition hint) when adding
              new  windows.   Using  PPosition  is required for some applications, but if you do not have one of
              those it's a real headache.  Many programs set PPosition to something obnoxious  like  0,0  (upper
              left corner).  Note: !UsePPosition is equivalent to the deprecated option !UsePPosition

              !UseUSPosition  works  like !UsePPosition but applies suppresses using the user specified position
              indicated by the program (USPosition hint).  It is generally a bad thing to  override  the  user's
              choice,  but some applications misuse the USPosition hint to force their windows to a certain spot
              on the screen without the user's consent.  Note: !UseUSPosition is equivalent  to  the  deprecated
              option !USPosition

              NoUseTransientPPosition  and  UseTransientPPosition  work  like !UsePPosition and UsePPosition but
              apply only to transient windows.  Note: !UseTransientPPosition is  equivalent  to  the  deprecated
              option !TransientPPosition

              NoUseIconPosition instructs fvwm to ignore the program specified icon position (IconPosition hint)
              when  iconifying  the  window.   Note:  !UseIconPosition  is  equivalent  to the deprecated option
              !IconPosition

              StartsOnDesk takes a numeric argument which is the desktop number on which the  window  should  be
              initially placed.  Note that standard Xt programs can also specify this via a resource (e.g. "-xrm
              '*Desk: 1'").

              StartsOnPage  takes  1, 2, or 3 numeric arguments.  If one or three arguments are given, the first
              (or only) argument is the desktop number.  If three arguments are given, the 2nd and 3rd arguments
              identify the x,y page position on the virtual window.  If two arguments are  given,  they  specify
              the  page  position, and indicate no desk preference.  If only one argument is given, StartsOnPage
              functions exactly like StartsOnDesk.  For those standard Xt programs which understand this  usage,
              the  starting  desk/page  can  also  be  specified  via  a resource (e.g., "-xrm '*page: 1 0 2'").
              StartsOnPage in conjunction with SkipMapping is a useful technique when you want to start  an  app
              on some other page and continue with what you were doing, rather than waiting for it to appear.

              StartsOnScreen  takes  one  argument.   It  can be 'p' for the primary screen, 'c' for the current
              screen (containing the mouse pointer), 'g' for the global  screen  or  the  screen  number  itself
              (counting from zero).  A new window is placed on the specified Xinerama screen.  The default is to
              place  windows  on  the  screen that contains the mouse pointer at the time the window is created.
              However, those windows which are not placed by fvwm (i.e., those with a  USPosition  hint  from  a
              user  specified  geometry)  are  normally placed in a position relative to the global screen.  The
              StartsOnScreen style is also useful to cause these windows to be placed  relative  to  a  specific
              Xinerama screen.  For example:

                  Style * StartsOnScreen c

              Would  cause  all  windows,  including  those with their own geometry to be placed relative to the
              current Xinerama screen rather than the global screen.   For  those  standard  Xt  programs  which
              understand  this  usage,  the starting desk/page can also be specified via a resource (e.g., "-xrm
              '*fvwmscreen: c'").  ('fvwmscreen' was chosen because some applications already use ´.screen'  for
              other purposes.)

              StartsOnPageIncludesTransients  causes  the  StartsOnPage  style  to be applied even for transient
              windows.  This is not usually useful, since transients are usually pop ups that you want to appear
              in your visible viewport; but occasionally an application uses a transient for  something  like  a
              startup window that needs to be coerced into place.

              ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage  suppresses StartsOnPage or StartsOnDesk placement in the event
              that both ManualPlacement and SkipMapping are in effect when a window is created.   This  prevents
              you from interactively placing a window and then wondering where it disappeared to, because it got
              placed  on  a  different  desk  or  page.  ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage allows this to happen
              anyway.  The option has no effect if SkipMapping is not in effect, because fvwm  switches  to  the
              proper     desk/page     to     perform     interactive     placement.      The     default     is
              ManualPlacementIgnoresStartsOnPage; ManualPlacementHonorsStartsOnPage  matches  the  way  the  old
              StartsOnDesk style used to handle the situation.

              CaptureHonorsStartsOnPage causes the initial capture (of an already existing window) at startup to
              place  the  window according to the StartsOnPage and StartsOnScreen desk, page and Xinerama screen
              specification.   CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage  causes  fvwm  to  ignore  these  settings  (including
              StartsOnDesk) on initial capture.  The default is CaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage.

              RecaptureHonorsStartsOnPage  causes  a  window  to  be  placed  according  to,  or  revert to, the
              StartsOnPage and StartsOnScreen desk,  page  and  Xinerama  screen  specification  on  Restart  or
              Recapture.   RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage  causes  fvwm  to respect the current window position on
              Restart or Recapture.  The default is RecaptureIgnoresStartsOnPage.

              Layer accepts one optional argument: a non-negative integer.  This is the layer the window is  put
              in.   If  no  argument  is  given,  any  previously  set value is deleted and the default layer is
              implied.

              StaysOnTop puts the window  in  the  top  layer.   This  layer  can  be  changed  by  the  command
              DefaultLayers; the default is 6.

              StaysPut  puts  the  window  in  the  put  layer.   This  layer  can  be  changed  by  the command
              DefaultLayers; the default is 4.

              StaysOnBottom puts the window in the bottom layer.  This layer  can  be  changed  by  the  command
              DefaultLayers; the default is 2.

              StartsLowered  instructs  fvwm  to put the window initially at the bottom of its layer rather than
              the default StartsRaised.

              StartShaded tells fvwm to shade the window.  An optional direction argument may  be  given,  which
              can be one of "North", "South", "West", "East", "NorthWest", "NorthEast", "SouthWest", "SouthEast"
              or if no direction is given, the default is to shade north.

              SkipMapping  tells  fvwm  not to switch to the desk the window is on when it gets mapped initially
              (useful with StartsOnDesk or StartsOnPage).

              KeepWindowGroupsOnDesk makes new windows that have the window group hint set appear  on  the  same
              desk  as  the  other windows of the same group.  Since this behavior may be confusing, the default
              setting is ScatterWindowGroups.  The window group hint is ignored when  placing  windows  in  this
              case.

       Transient windows
              DecorateTransient  causes  transient windows, which are normally left undecorated, to be given the
              usual fvwm decorations (title bar, buttons, etc.).  Note that some pop-up  windows,  such  as  the
              xterm  menus,  are  not  managed  by  the  window  manager  and  still do not receive decorations.
              NakedTransient (the default) causes transient windows not to be given  the  standard  decorations.
              You  can only bind keys or mouse buttons to the sides and the client part of an undecorated window
              ('S' and ´W' contexts in bindings, see Mouse and Key commands).

              A window with the RaiseTransient style that has transient windows raises all its  transients  when
              it  is raised.  The DontRaiseTransient style disables this behavior.  All windows are then treated
              as if they had no transients.

              A window with the LowerTransient style that has transient windows lowers all its  transients  when
              it is lowered.  The DontLowerTransient style disables this behavior.  All windows are then treated
              as if they had no transients.

              The  StackTransientParent  style  augments  RaiseTransient  and  LowerTransient styles.  Raising a
              window with StackTransientParent style transfers the raise action to the main window if the window
              being raised is a transient and its main window has RaiseTransient style; this effect makes  raise
              on  a  transient  act  just  like raise on its main - the whole group is raised.  Similar behavior
              holds for  lowering  a  whole  group  of  transients  when  the  main  has  LowerTransient  style.
              DontStackTransientParent  turns  this  behavior  off.  (Dont)StackTransientParent has no effect if
              RaiseTransient and LowerTransient are not used.

              A reasonable emulation of Motif raise/lower on transients is possible like this

                  Style * RaiseTransient
                  Style * LowerTransient
                  Style * StackTransientParent

       Extended Window Manager Hints styles
              To understand the used terminology in this sub section, please read the  Extended  Window  Manager
              Hints section.

              EWMHDonateIcon  instructs fvwm to set the application ewmh icon hint with the icon that is used by
              fvwm if the application does not provide such hint (and if the icon used by fvwm is  not  an  icon
              window).   EWMHDonateMiniIcon  does  the  same thing for mini icons.  This allows compliant pager,
              taskbar, iconbox ...etc to display the same (mini) icons as fvwm.   Note  that  on  some  hardware
              (e.g.,  8-bit  displays) these styles can slow down window mapping and that in general only one of
              these styles is needed by a compliant application.  EWMHDontDonateIcon and  EWMHDontDonateMiniIcon
              restore the defaults which are to not set any ewmh (mini) icons hints.

              By  default,  if  an  application provides an ewmh icon hint of small size (i.e., height and width
              less than or equal to 22), then fvwm uses  this  icon  as  its  mini  icon.   EWMHMiniIconOverride
              instructs  fvwm  to  ignore  ewmh  icons  and to use the mini icon provided by the MiniIcon style.
              EWMHNoMiniIconOverride restores the default.

              EWMHUseStackingOrderHints causes fvwm to use EWMH hints and respect EWMH hints  which  change  the
              window layer.  EWMHIgnoreStackingOrderHints causes fvwm to ignore EWMH layer hints.

              An  application can ask for some reserved space on the desktop by a hint.  In the EWMH terminology
              such a hint is called a strut and it is used to compute the working  area  and  may  be  used  for
              window  placement  and  in  the maximize command.  EWMHIgnoreStrutHints causes fvwm to ignore such
              hints, as EWMHUseStrutHints, causes fvwm to use it which is the default.

              EWMHIgnoreStateHints causes fvwm to ignore initial EWMH state hints when a new window  is  mapped.
              The default EWMHUseStateHints causes fvwm to accept such hints.

              EWMHIgnoreWindowType   causes  fvwm  to  ignore  EWMH  window  type  specification.   The  default
              !EWMHIgnoreWindowType causes fvwm to style windows of specified types as such.

              EWMHMaximizeIgnoreWorkingArea causes fvwm to ignore the EWMH  working  area  when  it  executes  a
              Maximize  command.   With  EWMHMaximizeUseWorkingArea  the  EWMH  working  area  is  used  as with
              EWMHMaximizeUseDynamicWorkingArea the EWMH dynamic working area is used (the default).

              EWMHPlacementIgnoreWorkingArea causes fvwm to ignore the EWMH working  area  when  it  places  (or
              places  again)  a  window.   With  EWMHPlacementUseWorkingArea  the  EWMH working area is taken in
              account as with EWMHPlacementUseDynamicWorkingArea the EWMH  dynamic  working  area  is  taken  in
              account  (the  default).   Note  that  with the MinOverlapPlacement and MinOverlapPercentPlacement
              placement policy, the way the EWMH (dynamic) working area is taken in account is configurable with
              the MinOverlapPlacementPenalties style.

       Miscellaneous
              The BackingStore, BackingStoreOff and BackingStoreWindowDefault determine if  the  X  server  uses
              backing  store  for  the  window  or  not.  BackingStore means that the X server tries to keep the
              obscured parts of a window in memory.  This is usually slower if  the  client  runs  on  the  same
              machine  as  the  X  server,  but can be much faster if the connection is slow (see also SaveUnder
              below).  BackingStoreOff disables backing store for the window.  By default, fvwm does not  enable
              or  disable  backing store itself but leaves is as the window requested it.  To revert back to the
              application's choice, use the BackingStoreWindowDefault style.

              Note: This style is useless if the X server does not allow backing store.

              SaveUnder enables the corresponding window attribute in the X server.  For  a  window  using  this
              style,  the X server tries to store the graphics below it in memory which is usually slower if the
              client runs on the same machine as the X server.  SaveUnder may speed up fvwm if the connection to
              the X server is slow (e.g. over a modem link).  To disable save under, use the SaveUnderOff style.
              This is the default.  See also BackingStore above.

              Note: This style is useless if the X server does not allow save under.

              ParentalRelativity enables clients that use a background pixmap of type ParentRelative to  achieve
              transparency.   Fvwm  modules that support transparent colorsets require this setting.  Opacity is
              the default and should be used for all non-transparent clients for better performance.

              MwmDecor makes fvwm attempt to recognize and respect the mwm decoration  hints  that  applications
              occasionally use.  To switch this style off, use the NoDecorHint style.

              MwmFunctions  makes fvwm attempt to recognize and respect the mwm prohibited operations hints that
              applications occasionally use.  HintOverride makes  fvwm  shade  out  operations  that  mwm  would
              prohibit, but it lets you perform the operation anyway.  NoFuncHint allows turns off the mwm hints
              completely.

              OLDecor makes fvwm attempt to recognize and respect the olwm and olvwm hints that many older XView
              and OLIT applications use.  Switch this option off with NoOLDecor.

              With  GNOMEIgnoreHints  fvwm  ignores  all GNOME hints for the window, even if GNOME compliance is
              compiled in.  This is useful for those pesky applications that try to be more clever than the user
              and use GNOME  hints  to  force  the  window  manager  to  ignore  the  user's  preferences.   The
              GNOMEUseHints style switches back to the default behavior.

              UseDecor  This  style is deprecated and will be removed in the future.  There are plans to replace
              it with a more flexible solution in fvwm-3.0.

              UseDecor accepts one argument: the name of a decor created with AddToDecor.  If no decor  name  is
              specified,  the  "Default"  decor is used.  Windows do not actually contain decors, but are always
              assigned to one.  If the decor is later modified with AddToDecor, the changes are visible for  all
              windows which are assigned to it.  The decor for a window can be reassigned with ChangeDecor.

              UseStyle  This  style is deprecated and will be removed in the future.  There are plans to replace
              it with a more flexible solution in fvwm-3.0.

              UseStyle takes one arg, which is the name of another style.   That  way  you  can  have  unrelated
              window names easily inherit similar traits without retyping.  For example:

                    Style rxvt UseStyle XTerm

              Warning: If a style is built from one or more parent styles and the parent styles are changed, the
              derived style is not modified.  To achieve this you have to issue the UseStyle line again.

              Unmanaged  Windows  with  the Unmanaged style option are ignored by fvwm.  They are not decorated,
              can not be moved or resized, etc.  You probably want to use Bugopts RaiseOverUnmanaged too.   This
              option  can be turned off with the !Unmanaged style.  However, windows that are already ignored at
              the time when the option is set must be recaptured with the Recapture command in order  to  become
              managed.

              State  sets  the initial value of one of the 32 user defined states which are associated with each
              window.  The state number ranges from 0 to 31 and must be given as an argument.  The  states  have
              no  meaning  in  fvwm,  but  they  can be checked in conditional commands like Next with the State
              condition and manipulated with the State command.

                  # turn on state 11 for xterms ...
                  Style xterm State 11
                  # ... but not for rxvts.
                  Style rxvt !State 11

              Windows with the WindowListSkip styles do not  appear  in  the  menu  that  is  created  with  the
              WindowList  command or the lists shown in modules like FvwmIconMan.  In the modules, the style can
              usually be ignored with an option.  Please refer to the man page of the  module  in  question  for
              further information.  To disable this feature, use the default style WindowListHit.

              The  styles CirculateSkip and CirculateHit control whether the window is considered by conditional
              commands, for example Next, Prev or All.   Windows  with  CirculateSkip,  are  never  selected  by
              conditional  commands.  However, the styles can be overridden explicitly in the condition with the
              CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon or CirculateHitShaded conditions, and  some  conditional  commands,
              e.g.   Current  and  All,  do  this  by  default.  The styles CirculateSkipIcon, CirculateHitIcon,
              CirculateSkipShaded and CirculateHitShaded work like CirculateSkip and CirculateHit but apply only
              to iconic or shaded windows.  Note: if multiple ...Skip... options are combined, windows are  only
              selected if they match none of the given conditions.  So, with

                  Style * CirculateSkipIcon, CirculateSkipShaded

              only  windows  that are neither iconic nor shaded are selected.  Note: For historical reasons, the
              conditional commands understand the names of these styles as condition names.  Take  care  not  to
              confuse them.

       Examples

                  # Change default fvwm behavior to no title-
                  # bars on windows! Also define a default icon.
                  Style *             !Title,                \
                                      Icon unknown1.xpm,     \
                                      BorderWidth 4,         \
                                      HandleWidth 5

                  # now, window specific changes:
                  Style Fvwm*       !Handles, Sticky,        \
                                    WindowListSkip,          \
                                    BorderWidth 0
                  Style FvwmPager   StaysOnTop, BorderWidth 0
                  Style *lock       !Handles, Sticky,        \
                                    StaysOnTop, WindowListSkip
                  Style xbiff       Sticky, WindowListSkip
                  Style FvwmButtons !Handles, Sticky,        \
                                    WindowListSkip
                  Style sxpm        !Handles

                  # Put title-bars back on xterms only!
                  Style xterm     Title, Color black/grey

                  Style rxvt        Icon term.xpm
                  Style xterm       Icon rterm.xpm
                  Style xcalc       Icon xcalc.xpm
                  Style xbiff       Icon mail1.xpm
                  Style xmh         Icon mail1.xpm,         \
                                      StartsOnDesk 2
                  Style xman        Icon xman.xpm
                  Style matlab      Icon math4.xpm,         \
                                      StartsOnDesk 3
                  Style xmag        Icon magnifying_glass2.xpm
                  Style xgraph      Icon graphs.xpm
                  Style FvwmButtons Icon toolbox.xpm
                  Style Maker       StartsOnDesk 1
                  Style signal      StartsOnDesk 3

                  # Fire up Netscape on the second desk, in the
                  # middle of my 3x3 virtual desktop, and do not
                  # bother me with it...
                  Style Netscape* SkipMapping,              \
                                  StartsOnPage 1 1 1

              Note  that  all properties for a window are or'ed together.  In the above example "FvwmPager" gets
              the property StaysOnTop via an exact  window  name  match  but  also  gets  !Handles,  Sticky  and
              WindowListSkip by a match to "Fvwm*".  It gets !Title by virtue of a match to "*".  If conflicting
              styles are specified for a window, then the last style specified is used.

       WindowStyle options
              sets  attributes  (styles)  on  the  selected window.  The options are exactly the same as for the
              Style command.

   Window Styles
       AddButtonStyle button [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Adds a button style to button.  button can be a button number, or one of "All", "Left" or "Right".
              state can be "ActiveUp", "ActiveDown", "InactiveUp" or "InactiveDown", or "Active"  (the  same  as
              both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown") or "Inactive" (the same as both "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown")
              or  any of these 6 with "Toggled" prepended.  The "Active" states apply to the focused window, the
              "Inactive" ones apply to all other windows.  The "Up" states apply to the non pressed buttons, the
              "Down" ones apply to pressed buttons.  The "Toggled" prefix refers to maximized, shaded or  sticky
              windows  that  have  the corresponding MwmDecor...  button style set.  Additionally, the following
              shortcuts may be used: "AllNormal", "AllToggled", "AllActive", "AllInactive", "AllUp",  "AllDown".
              They  are actually different masks for 4 individual states from 8 total.  These are supported too:
              "AllActiveUp", "AllActiveDown", "AllInactiveUp", "AllInactiveDown".

              If state is omitted, then the style is added to every state.  If the style and flags are  enclosed
              in  parentheses,  then  multiple  state  definitions  can  be  placed on a single line.  Flags for
              additional button styles cannot be changed after definition.

              Buttons are drawn in the order of  definition,  beginning  with  the  most  recent  button  style,
              followed by those added with AddButtonStyle.  To clear the button style stack, change style flags,
              or for descriptions of available styles and flags, see the ButtonStyle command.  Examples:

                  ButtonStyle 1 Pixmap led.xpm -- Top Left
                  ButtonStyle 1 ActiveDown HGradient 8 grey black
                  ButtonStyle All --  UseTitleStyle
                  AddButtonStyle 1 \
                       ActiveUp (Pixmap a.xpm) \
                       ActiveDown (Pixmap b.xpm -- Top)
                  AddButtonStyle 1 Vector 4 50x30@1 70x70@0 30x70@0 50x30@1

              Initially  for  this  example all button states are set to a pixmap.  The second line replaces the
              "ActiveDown" state with a gradient (it overrides the pixmap assigned to it  in  the  line  before,
              which  assigned  the  same  style  to  every  state).  Then, the UseTitleStyle flag is set for all
              buttons, which causes fvwm to draw any styles set with  TitleStyle  before  drawing  the  buttons.
              Finally,  AddButtonStyle  is used to place additional pixmaps for both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown"
              states and a vector button style is drawn on top of all states.

       AddTitleStyle [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Adds a title style to the title-bar.  state  can  be  "ActiveUp",  "ActiveDown",  "InactiveUp"  or
              "InactiveDown", or "Active" (the same as both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown") or "Inactive" (the same
              as  both "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown") or any of these 6 with "Toggled" prepended.  If state is
              omitted, then the style is added to  every  state.   If  the  style  and  flags  are  enclosed  in
              parentheses,  then  multiple  state  definitions  can be placed on a single line.  This command is
              quite similar to the AddButtonStyle command.

              Title-bars are drawn in the order of  definition,  beginning  with  the  most  recent  TitleStyle,
              followed  by  those added with AddTitleStyle.  To clear the title style stack, change style flags,
              or for the descriptions of  available  styles  and  flags,  see  the  TitleStyle  and  ButtonStyle
              commands.

       AddToDecor decor
              This  command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.  There are plans to replace it with
              a more flexible solution in fvwm-3.0.

              Add or divert commands to the decor named decor.  A decor is a name given to the set  of  commands
              which  affect  button  styles,  title-bar styles and border styles.  If decor does not exist it is
              created; otherwise the existing decor is modified.  Note: Earlier  versions  allowed  to  use  the
              HilightColor,  HilightColorset  and  WindowFont  commands  in decors.  This is no longer possible.
              Please use the Style command with the Hilight... and Font options.

              New decors start out exactly like the "default" decor without  any  style  definitions.   A  given
              decor may be applied to a set of windows with the UseDecor option of the Style command.  Modifying
              an existing decor affects all windows which are currently assigned to it.

              AddToDecor  is  similar  in  usage  to the AddToMenu and AddToFunc commands, except that menus and
              functions are replaced by ButtonStyle, AddButtonStyle, TitleStyle, AddTitleStyle  and  BorderStyle
              commands.   Decors  created  with  AddToDecor  can  be manipulated with ChangeDecor, DestroyDecor,
              UpdateDecor and the Style option.

              The following example creates a decor  "FlatDecor"  and  style  "FlatStyle".   They  are  distinct
              entities:

                  AddToDecor FlatDecor
                  + ButtonStyle All Active (-- flat) Inactive (-- flat)
                  + TitleStyle  -- flat
                  + BorderStyle -- HiddenHandles NoInset

                  Style FlatStyle \
                       UseDecor FlatDecor, HandleWidth 4, ForeColor white, \
                       BackColor grey40, HilightFore black, HilightBack grey70

                  Style xterm UseStyle FlatStyle

              An  existing  window's  decor  may  be reassigned with ChangeDecor.  A decor can be destroyed with
              DestroyDecor.

                  DestroyDecor FlatDecor
                  AddToDecor FlatDecor ...

                  Style FlatStyle UseDecor FlatDecor

              and now apply the style again:

                  Style xterm UseStyle FlatStyle

       BorderStyle state [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Defines a border style for windows.  state can be either "Active"  or  "Inactive".   If  state  is
              omitted,  then  the  style  is  set  for  both  states.   If  the  style and flags are enclosed in
              parentheses, then multiple state definitions can be specified per line.

              style is a subset of the available button styles, and can only  be  TiledPixmap  (uniform  pixmaps
              which  match  the bevel colors work best this way) or Colorset.  If a '!' is prefixed to any flag,
              the behavior is negated.  If style is not specified, then one can change flags  without  resetting
              the style.

              The HiddenHandles flag hides the corner handle dividing lines on windows with handles (this option
              has no effect for !Handles windows).  By default, HiddenHandles is disabled.

              The  NoInset flag supplements HiddenHandles.  If given, the inner bevel around the window frame is
              not drawn.  If HiddenHandles is not specified, the frame looks a little strange.

              Raised causes a raised relief pattern to be drawn (default).  Sunk causes a sunken relief  pattern
              to be drawn.  Flat inhibits the relief pattern from being drawn.

              To decorate the active and inactive window borders with a textured pixmap, one might specify:

                  BorderStyle Active TiledPixmap marble.xpm
                  BorderStyle Inactive TiledPixmap granite.xpm
                  BorderStyle Active -- HiddenHandles NoInset

              To clear the style for both states:

                  BorderStyle Simple

              To clear for a single state:

                  BorderStyle Active Simple

              To unset a flag for a given state:

                  BorderStyle Inactive -- !NoInset

              title-bar buttons can inherit the border style with the UseBorderStyle flag (see ButtonStyle).

       ButtonState [ActiveDown bool] [Inactive bool] [InactiveDown bool]
              The  ButtonState  command  controls  which states of the window titles and title buttons are used.
              The default is to use all four states: "ActiveUp", "ActiveDown", "InactiveUp"  and  "InactiveDown"
              (see  ButtonStyle  and TitleStyle commands).  The bool argument after the key word controls if the
              designated state is used ("True") or not ("False").  The bool flag is the same as other  commands,
              and  not limited to just "True" or "False"; "Yes" and "No" may also be used.  The "ActiveUp" state
              cannot be deactivated.  If no arguments are provided or  the  given  arguments  are  illegal,  the
              default is restored.

              If  ActiveDown  argument  is "False", no different button style for the pressed down buttons used,
              instead "ActiveUp" state is used even when button is pressed.

              If Inactive argument is "False", focused and unfocused windows look similarly,  the  corresponding
              "Active" states are always used.

              If InactiveDown argument is "False" (only applied when Inactive is "True"), the pressed titles and
              title  buttons  in non-focused windows are drawn using "InactiveUp" or "ActiveUp" states depending
              on the values of the other key words.

       ButtonStyle button [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Sets the button style for a title-bar button.  button is the title-bar button number between 0 and
              9, or one of "All", "Left", "Right", or "Reset".  Button  numbering  is  described  in  the  Mouse
              command  section.   If  the  style  and  flags  are  enclosed  in parentheses, then multiple state
              definitions can be specified per line.

              state refers to which button  state  should  be  set.   Button  states  are  defined  as  follows:
              "ActiveUp"  and  "ActiveDown"  refer  to  the  un-pressed and pressed states for buttons on active
              windows; while the "InactiveUp" and "InactiveDown" states denote buttons on inactive windows.  The
              shortcut "Active" denotes both "ActiveUp" and "ActiveDown" states.   Shortcut  "Inactive"  denotes
              both  "InactiveUp"  and  "InactiveDown"  states.  The similar state names like just described, but
              with the "Toggled" prefix are used instead for title buttons which have one  of  the  MwmDecorMax,
              MwmDecorShade, MwmDecorStick or MwmDecorLayer hints, if the window is maximized, shaded, sticky or
              placed on specific layer, respectively.

                  AddToDecor Default
                   + ButtonStyle 6                   \
                     Vector 4 50x25@1 85x75@0 15x75@0 50x25@1
                   + ButtonStyle 6 ToggledActiveUp   \
                     Vector 4 50x75@0 85x25@1 15x25@0 50x75@0
                   + ButtonStyle 6 ToggledActiveDown \
                     Vector 4 50x75@0 85x25@1 15x25@0 50x75@0
                   + ButtonStyle 6 ToggledInactive   \
                     Vector 4 50x75@0 85x25@1 15x25@0 50x75@0
                   + ButtonStyle 6 - MwmDecorShade
                  Mouse 0 6 N WindowShade

              Additionally,  the  following  shortcuts  may  be  used:  "AllNormal",  "AllToggled", "AllActive",
              "AllInactive", "AllUp", "AllDown".  They are actually different masks for 4 individual states from
              8  total.    These   are   supported   too:   "AllActiveUp",   "AllActiveDown",   "AllInactiveUp",
              "AllInactiveDown".

              If  state  is specified, that particular button state is set.  If state is omitted, every state is
              set.  Specifying a style destroys the current style (use AddButtonStyle to avoid this).

              If style is omitted, then state-dependent flags can be set for the primary  button  style  without
              destroying the current style.  Examples (each line should be considered independent):

                  ButtonStyle Left -- flat
                  ButtonStyle All ActiveUp (-- flat) Inactive (-- flat)

              The  first  line  sets  every  state  of  the left buttons to flat, while the second sets only the
              "ActiveUp" and "Inactive" states of every button to flat (only flags  are  changed;  the  buttons'
              individual styles are not changed).

              If you want to reset all buttons to their defaults:

                  ButtonStyle Reset

              To reset the "ActiveUp" button state of button 1 to the default:

                  ButtonStyle 1 ActiveUp Default

              To reset all button states of button 1 to the default of button number 2:

                  ButtonStyle 1 Default 2

              For  any  button,  multiple  state definitions can be given on one line by enclosing the style and
              flags in parentheses.  If only one definition per line is given the parentheses can be omitted.

              flags affect the specified state.  If a '!'  is prefixed to any flag,  its  behavior  is  negated.
              The available state-dependent flags for all styles are described here (the ButtonStyle entry deals
              with state-independent flags).

              Raised causes a raised relief pattern to be drawn.

              Sunk causes a sunken relief pattern to be drawn.

              Flat inhibits the relief pattern from being drawn.

              UseTitleStyle causes the given button state to render the current title style before rendering the
              buttons'  own  styles.   The  Raised,  Flat  and  Sunk TitleStyle flags are ignored since they are
              redundant in this context.

              UseBorderStyle causes the button to inherit the decorated BorderStyle options.

              Raised, Sunk and Flat are mutually exclusive, and can be specified  for  the  initial  ButtonStyle
              only.   UseTitleStyle  and  UseBorderStyle  are also mutually exclusive (both can be off however).
              The default is Raised with both UseBorderStyle and UseTitleStyle left unset.

              Important

              for the "ActiveDown" and "InactiveDown" states:  When a button is pressed, the relief is inverted.
              Because of this, to obtain the raised look in  "ActiveDown"  or  "InactiveDown"  states  you  must
              specify  the opposite of the desired relief (i.e.  Sunk for "ActiveDown" or "InactiveDown").  This
              behavior is consistent, but may seem confusing at  first.   The  same  applies  to  the  "Toggled"
              states.

              Button  styles  are  classified  as  non-destructive, partially destructive, or fully destructive.
              Non-destructive styles do not affect the image.  Partially destructive styles can obscure some  or
              all  parts  of  the  underlying image (i.e.  Pixmap).  Fully destructive styles obscure the entire
              underlying image (i.e.  Solid or one of the gradient  styles).   Thus,  if  stacking  styles  with
              AddButtonStyle  (or  AddTitleStyle  for  title-bars),  use  care  in sequencing styles to minimize
              redraw.

              The available styles are:

              Simple,  Default,  Solid,  Colorset,  Vector,  ?Gradient,  Pixmap,  AdjustedPixmap,  ShrunkPixmap,
              StretchedPixmap, TiledPixmap, MiniIcon

              The description of these styles and their arguments follow:

              The  Simple  style  does  nothing.   There  are  no  arguments,  and this style is an example of a
              non-destructive button style.

              The Default style conditionally accepts one argument: a number which specifies the default  button
              number  to  load.   If  the  style command given is ButtonStyle or AddButtonStyle, the argument is
              optional (if given, it overrides the current button).  If a  command  other  than  ButtonStyle  or
              AddButtonStyle is used, the number must be specified.

              The  Solid  style  fills  the button with a solid color.  The relief border color is not affected.
              The color is specified as a single argument.  This style is fully destructive.

              The Colorset cs [alpha] style fills the button with the Colorset cs.  The optional alpha  argument
              is  a  percentage  between  0  and  100.  It causes fvwm to merge the colorset background onto the
              button using this percentage.  If the percentage is 0 the colorset background is hidden and if  it
              is  100  the  colorset  background is fully applied.  The default is 100.  So, the destructiveness
              depends on the alpha argument.

              The Vector num X[offsetp]xY[offsetp]@C ...  style draws a line pattern.  Since this is a  standard
              button  style, the keyword Vector is optional, num is a number of point specifications of the form
              X[offsetp]xY[offsetp]@C ...  X and Y are point coordinates inside the button,  given  in  percents
              (from  0  to  100).   An  optional  absolute  offset in pixels, can be given as "+<offset>p" for a
              positive or "-<offset>p" for a negative offset.

              C specifies a line color (0 - the shadow color, 1 - the highlight color, 2 - the background color,
              3 - the foreground color, 4 - only move the point, do not draw).  The first  point  color  is  not
              used.  You can use up to 10000 points in a line pattern.  This style is partially destructive.

              The specification is a little cumbersome:

                  ButtonStyle 2 Vector 4 50x30@1 70x70@0 30x70@0 50x30@1

              then  the  button  2  decoration  uses  a 4-point pattern consisting of a line from (x=50,y=30) to
              (70,70) in the shadow color (@0), and then to (30,70) in the shadow color, and finally to  (50,30)
              in the highlight color (@1).  Is that too confusing? See the fvwm web pages for some examples with
              screenshots.

              A more complex example of Vector:

                  ButtonStyle 8 Vector 10 45x65@2 45x75@3 \
                    20x75@3 20x50@3 35x50@3 35x65@1 35x25@1 \
                    75x25@1 75x65@0 35x65@0
                  ButtonStyle 0 Vector 10 45x65@2 45x75@0 \
                    20x75@0 20x50@1 45x50@1 45x65@0 75x65@3 \
                    75x25@3 35x25@3 35x47@3

              The  ?Gradient  styles  denote  color  gradients.   Fill  in the question mark with any one of the
              defined gradient types.  Please refer to the Color Gradients section  for  a  description  of  the
              gradient syntax.  The gradient styles are fully destructive.

              The  Pixmap  style  displays a pixmap.  A pixmap should be specified as an argument.  For example,
              the following would give button number 2 the same  pixmap  for  all  4  states  (2  active  and  2
              inactive), and button number 4 all different pixmaps.

                  ButtonStyle 2 Pixmap my_pixmap.xpm
                  ButtonStyle 4 \
                       ActiveUp (Pixmap activeup.xpm) \
                       ActiveDown (Pixmap activedown.xpm) \
                       Inactive (Pixmap inactiveup.xpm)
                  ButtonStyle 4 \
                       InactiveDown Pixmap inactivedown.xpm

              The pixmap specification can be given as an absolute or relative pathname (see ImagePath).  If the
              pixmap  cannot  be  found, the button style reverts to Simple.  Flags specific to the Pixmap style
              are Left, Right, Top, and Bottom.  These can be used to justify the pixmap  (default  is  centered
              for  both  directions).  Pixmap transparency is used for the color "None." This style is partially
              destructive.

              The AdjustedPixmap style is similar to the Pixmap style.  But the image is resized to exactly  fit
              the button.

              The ShrunkPixmap style is similar to the Pixmap style.  But if the image is bigger than the button
              the image is resized to fit into the button.

              The  StretchedPixmap  style  is similar to the Pixmap style.  But if the image is smaller than the
              button the image is resized to cover the button.

              The TiledPixmap style accepts a pixmap to be tiled  as  the  button  background.   One  pixmap  is
              specified as an argument.  Pixmap transparency is not used.  This style is fully destructive.

              The  MiniIcon  style  draws the window's miniature icon in the button, which is specified with the
              MiniIcon option of the Style command.  This button style accepts no arguments.  Example:

                  Style *     MiniIcon mini-bx2.xpm
                  Style xterm MiniIcon mini-term.xpm
                  Style Emacs MiniIcon mini-doc.xpm

                  ButtonStyle 1 MiniIcon

       ButtonStyle button - [!]flag ...
              Sets state-independent flags for the specified  button.   State-independent  flags  affect  button
              behavior.  Each flag is separated by a space.  If a '!'  is prefixed to the flag then the behavior
              is negated.  The special flag Clear clears any existing flags.

              The following flags are usually used to tell fvwm which buttons should be affected by mwm function
              hints  (see  MwmFunctions  option  of the Style command.  This is not done automatically since you
              might have buttons bound to complex functions, for instance.

              MwmDecorMenu should be assigned to title-bar buttons which display a menu.  The default assignment
              is the leftmost button.  When a window with the MwmFunctions Style option  requests  not  to  show
              this button, it is hidden.

              MwmDecorMin  should  be  assigned  to title-bar buttons which minimize or iconify the window.  The
              default assignment is the second button over from the rightmost button.  When a  window  with  the
              MwmFunctions Style option requests not to show this button, it is hidden.

              MwmDecorMax  should  be  assigned  to  title-bar  buttons  which maximize the window.  The default
              assignment is the rightmost button.  When a window with the MwmFunctions Style option requests not
              to show this button, it is hidden.  When the window is maximized, the vector pattern on the button
              looks pressed in.

              MwmDecorShade should be assigned to title-bar buttons which  shade  the  window  (see  WindowShade
              command).  When the window is shaded, the vector pattern on the button looks pressed in.

              MwmDecorStick  should  be  assigned  to  title-bar buttons which make the window sticky.  When the
              window is sticky, the vector pattern on the button looks pressed in.

              The flag MwmDecorLayer layer should be assigned to title-bar buttons which place the window in the
              layer numbered layer.  When the window is on that specific layer, the vector pattern on the button
              looks pressed in.

       ChangeDecor decor
              This command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.  There are plans to replace it  with
              a more flexible solution in fvwm-3.0.

              Changes  the  decor  of a window to decor.  decor is "Default" or the name of a decor defined with
              AddToDecor.  If decor is invalid, nothing occurs.  If called from somewhere in  a  window  or  its
              border,  then  that  window  is  affected.   If called from the root window the user is allowed to
              select the target window.  ChangeDecor  only  affects  attributes  which  can  be  set  using  the
              AddToDecor command.

                  ChangeDecor CustomDecor1

       DestroyDecor [recreate] decor
              This  command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.  There are plans to replace it with
              a more flexible solution in fvwm-3.0.

              Deletes the decor defined with AddToDecor, so that subsequent  references  to  it  are  no  longer
              valid.   Windows  using this decor revert to the "Default" decor.  The optional parameter recreate
              tells fvwm not to throw away the decor completely but to throw away only  its  contents.   If  the
              decor  is  created  again  later, windows do not use it before the UseDecor style is applied again
              unless the decor was destroyed with the recreate option.  The  decor  named  "Default"  cannot  be
              destroyed.

                  DestroyDecor CustomDecor1

       TitleStyle [justification] [Height [num]] [MinHeight [num]]
              Sets   attributes   for   the  title-bar.   Justifications  can  be  Centered,  RightJustified  or
              LeftJustified.  Height sets the title bar's height to an amount in  pixels.   MinHeight  sets  the
              minimal height in pixels of the title bar.  Defaults are Centered, the window's font height and no
              minimal  height.   To  reset the font height to the default value, omit the num argument after the
              Height keyword.  The MinHeight height is reset by Height or if given with no argument.  Example:

                  TitleStyle LeftJustified Height 24

       TitleStyle [state] [style] [-- [!]flag ...]
              Sets the style for the title-bar.  See also AddTitleStyle and ButtonStyle  state  can  be  one  of
              "ActiveUp", "ActiveDown", "InactiveUp", or "InactiveDown".  Shortcuts like "Active" and "Inactive"
              are  allowed.  The states with the "Toggled" prefix are allowed too, the title itself does not use
              "Toggled" states, but these states are used for the buttons with  ButtonStyle  UseTitleStyle.   If
              state  is  omitted,  then the style is added to every state.  If parentheses are placed around the
              style and flags, then multiple state definitions can be given per line.  style can be  omitted  so
              that flags can be set while not destroying the current style.

              If  a  '!'   is prefixed to any flag, its behavior is negated.  Valid flags for each state include
              Raised, Flat and Sunk (these are mutually exclusive).  The default is Raised.   See  the  note  in
              ButtonStyle regarding the "ActiveDown" state.  Examples:

                  TitleStyle ActiveUp HGradient 16 navy black
                  TitleStyle \
                       ActiveDown (Solid red -- flat) \
                       Inactive (TiledPixmap wood.xpm)
                  TitleStyle \
                       ActiveUp (-- Flat) \
                       ActiveDown (-- Raised) \
                       InactiveUp (-- Flat) \
                       InactiveDown (-- Sunk)

              This  sets the "ActiveUp" state to a horizontal gradient, the "ActiveDown" state to solid red, and
              the "Inactive" states to a tiled wood pixmap.  Finally, "ActiveUp" and  "InactiveUp"  are  set  to
              look flat, while "ActiveDown" set to be sunk (the Raised flag for the "ActiveDown" state causes it
              to  appear  sunk  due  to relief inversion), and "InactiveDown" is set to look raised.  An example
              which sets flags for all states:

                  TitleStyle -- flat

              For a flattened look:

                  TitleStyle -- flat
                  ButtonStyle All Active (-- flat) Inactive (-- flat)

              TitleStyle accepts all the ButtonStyle styles and arguments:

              Simple,  Default,  Solid,  Colorset,  Vector,  ?Gradient,  Pixmap,  AdjustedPixmap,  ShrunkPixmap,
              StretchedPixmap, TiledPixmap, MiniIcon.

              See the ButtonStyle command for a description of all these styles and their arguments.

              In  addition to these styles TitleStyle accepts a powerful MultiPixmap option.  This allows you to
              specify different pixmaps, colorsets or colors for different parts of the titlebar.  Some of  them
              are  tiled  or  stretched to fit a particular space; others are discrete "transition" images.  The
              definable sections are:

              Main
                  The full titlebar

              LeftMain
                  Left of title text

              RightMain
                  Right of title text

              UnderText
                  Underneath title text

              LeftOfText
                  just to the left of the title text

              RightOfText
                  just to the right of the title text

              LeftEnd
                  at the far left end of the titlebar (just after left buttons if any)

              RightEnd
                  at the far right end of the titlebar (just before right buttons if any)

              Buttons
                  under buttons in case of UseTitleStyle

              LeftButtons
                  under left buttons in case of UseTitleStyle

              RightButtons
                  under right buttons in case of UseTitleStyle

              None of these are mandatory except for Main (or, if you do not define Main you  must  define  both
              LeftMain and RightMain).  If no Buttons pixmaps are defined and UseTitleStyle is specified for one
              or more buttons, Main, LeftMain or RightMain are used as appropriate.

              The syntax for this style type is:

                  MultiPixmap section style arg, ...

              continuing  for whatever you want to define.  The style can be either TiledPixmap, AdjustedPixmap,
              Colorset or Solid.  See the ButtonStyle command for the description of these styles.  In the  case
              of  a transition section, LeftEnd, LeftOfText, RightOfText or RightEnd, AdjustedPixmap only resize
              the pixmap in the "y" direction.  For the Colorset and Solid styles a width of  the  half  of  the
              title bar height is assumed for the transition sections.

              An example:

                  MultiPixmap Main AdjustedPixmap foo.xpm, \
                              UnderText TiledPixmap bar.xpm, \
                              Buttons Colorset 2

              Note  that  the old syntax is still supported: if the style is omitted, TiledPixmap is assumed and
              adding "(stretched)" between the section and the file name implies AdjustedPixmap.

       UpdateDecor [decor]
              This command is deprecated and will be removed in the future.  There are plans to replace it  with
              a more flexible solution in fvwm-3.0.

              This command is kept mainly for backward compatibility.  Since all elements of a decor are updated
              immediately when they are changed, this command is mostly useless.

              Updates  window  decorations.   decor is an optional argument which specifies the decor to update.
              If given, only windows which are assigned to that particular decor are updated.  This  command  is
              useful, for instance, after a ButtonStyle, TitleStyle or BorderStyle (possibly used in conjunction
              with AddToDecor).  Specifying an invalid decor results in all windows being updated.  This command
              is less disturbing than Recapture, but does not affect window style options as Recapture does.

   Controlling the Virtual Desktop
       Desk arg1 [arg2] [min max]
              This command has been renamed.  Please see GotoDesk command.

       DesktopName desk name
              Defines  the name of the desktop number desk to name.  This name is used in the WindowList command
              and in the FvwmPager where it override the Label configuration option.  Moreover,  if  consecutive
              names  starting  from  desktop  0  are defined, then these names can be used by any EWMH compliant
              application (as a pager).

       DesktopSize HorizontalxVertical
              Defines the virtual desktop size in units of the physical screen size.

       EdgeResistance delayEdgeResistance scrolling moving [xinerama-scrolling]
              Tells how hard it should be to change the desktop viewport by moving the mouse over  the  edge  of
              the  screen.   The parameter tells how many milliseconds the pointer must spend on the screen edge
              before fvwm moves the viewport.  This is intended for people who use

                  EdgeScroll 100 100

              but find themselves accidentally flipping pages when they do not want to.  If -1 is given  as  the
              delay, scrolling is disabled completely.

              The  second form of invocation with two or three arguments is obsolete and should be replaced with
              the following three commands as needed:

                  EdgeResistance scrolling
                  Style * EdgeMoveDelay scrolling
                  Style * EdgeMoveResistance moving
                  or
                  Style * EdgeMoveResistance moving xinerama-scrolling

              Fvwm does this substitution automatically and prints a warning.

       EdgeScroll horizontal[p] vertical[p] [wrap | wrapx | wrapy]
              Specifies the percentage of a page to scroll when the cursor hits the edge of a page.  A  trailing
              'p'  changes  the  interpretation to mean pixels.  If you do not want any paging or scrolling when
              you hit the edge of a page include

                  EdgeScroll 0 0

              in your config file, or possibly better, set the EdgeThickness to  zero.   See  the  EdgeThickness
              command.  If you want whole pages, use

                  EdgeScroll 100 100

              Both horizontal and vertical should be positive numbers.

              If  the  horizontal  and  vertical percentages are multiplied by 1000 or one of the keywords wrap,
              wrapx and wrapy is given then scrolling wraps around at the edge of the desktop.  If

                  EdgeScroll 100000 100000

              is used fvwm scrolls by whole pages, wrapping around at the edge of the desktop.

       EdgeThickness 0 | 1 | 2
              This is the width or height of the invisible window that fvwm creates on the edges of  the  screen
              that are used for the edge scrolling feature.

              In  order  to enable page scrolling via the mouse, four windows called the "pan frames" are placed
              at the very edge of the screen.  This is how fvwm detects the mouse's presence at the window edge.
              Because of the way this works, they need to be at the top of the stack and eat mouse events, so if
              you have any kind of error along the lines of: "mouse clicks at the edge  of  the  screen  do  the
              wrong  thing"  you're having trouble with the pan frames and (assuming you do not use the mouse to
              flip between pages) should set the EdgeThickness to 0.

              A value of 0 completely disables mouse edge scrolling, even while dragging a window.  1 gives  the
              smallest pan frames, which seem to work best except on some servers.

              2 is the default.

              Pan frames of 1 or 2 pixels can sometimes be confusing, for example, if you drag a window over the
              edge  of  the screen, so that it straddles a pan frame, clicks on the window, near the edge of the
              screen are treated as clicks on the root window.

       EwmhBaseStruts left right top bottom
              Where left, right, top and bottom are positive or null integers which define bands at the edge  of
              the screen.  left defines a band on the left of your screen of width left, right defines a band on
              the  right  of  your screen of width right, top defines a band on the top of your screen of height
              top and bottom defines a band on the bottom of your screen of height  bottom.   The  unit  is  the
              pixel  and  the  default is 0 0 0 0.  These areas define additional reserved space to the reserved
              space defined by some ewmh compliant applications.  This is used to compute the Working Area.  See
              the Extended Window Manager Hints section for a definition of the Working Area.

       EwmhNumberOfDesktops num [max]
              This command is useful only for an ewmh compliant pager or taskbar (as kpager or  kicker  taskbar)
              and  not  for  fvwm  modules  (  FvwmPager  or FvwmIconMan).  It causes a compliant application to
              consider at least num desktops (desktop 0 to desktop num-1).  The optional argument max  causes  a
              compliant  application  to never consider more than max desktops.  If max is 0 (the default) there
              is no limitation.  The actual number of desktops is determined dynamically.  It is at  least  num,
              but it can be d if there is a window on desktop d-1 (or if the current desktop is desktop d-1) and
              d  is  less  or  equal  to  max or max is null.  Moreover, a compliant pager can ask to change num
              itself.  This is accepted by fvwm only if this number is less than or equal to max or  if  max  is
              null.   Note that negative desktops are not supported by the ewmh specification.  The default is 4
              0.

       GotoDesk [prev | arg1 [arg2] [min max]]
              Switches the current viewport to another desktop (workspace, room).

              The command takes 1, 2, 3, or 4 arguments.  A single argument is interpreted as  a  relative  desk
              number.   Two arguments are understood as a relative and an absolute desk number.  Three arguments
              specify a relative desk and the minimum and  maximum  of  the  allowable  range.   Four  arguments
              specify  the  relative,  absolute, minimum and maximum values.  (Desktop numbers can be negative).
              If a literal prev is given as the single argument, the last visited desk number is used.

              If arg1 is non zero then the next desktop number is the current desktop number plus arg1.

              If arg1 is zero then the new desktop number is arg2.  (If arg2 is not present,  then  the  command
              has no effect.)

              If  min  and  max are given, the new desktop number is no smaller than min and no bigger than max.
              Values out of this range are truncated (if you gave an absolute desk number) or wrapped around (if
              you gave a relative desk number).

              The syntax is the same as for MoveToDesk, which moves a window to a different desktop.

              The number of active desktops is determined dynamically.  Only desktops which contain  windows  or
              are  currently  being  displayed  are  active.   Desktop  numbers  must  be between 2147483647 and
              -2147483648 (is that enough?).

       GotoDeskAndPage prev | desk xpage ypage
              Switches the current viewport to another desktop and page, similar to the  GotoDesk  and  GotoPage
              commands.  The new desk is desk and the new page is (xpage,ypage).

       GotoPage prev | [options] x[p] y[p]
              Moves the desktop viewport to page (x,y).  The upper left page is (0,0), the upper right is (M,0),
              where  M  is  one  less  than  the current number of horizontal pages specified in the DesktopSize
              command.  The lower left page is (0,N), and the  lower  right  page  is  (M,N),  where  N  is  the
              desktop's  vertical size as specified in the DesktopSize command.  To switch to a page relative to
              the current one add a trailing 'p' after any or both numerical arguments.

              Possible options are wrapx and wrapy to wrap around the x or y coordinate  when  the  viewport  is
              moved beyond the border of the desktop.

              To  go  to the last visited page use prev as the first argument.  The GotoPage function should not
              be used in a pop-up menu.

              Examples:

                  # Go to page (2,3)
                  GotoPage 2 3

                  # Go to lowest and rightmost page
                  GotoPage -1 -1

                  # Go to last page visited
                  GotoPage prev

                  # Go two pages to the right and one page up
                  GotoPage +2p -1p

       Scroll [horizonal[p] vertical[p] | reverse]
              Scrolls the virtual desktop's viewport by horizontal pages in the x-direction and  vertical  pages
              in the y-direction or starts interactive scrolling of the viewport.  Either or both entries may be
              negative.  Both horizontal and vertical values are expressed in percent of pages, so

                  Scroll 100 100

              means to scroll down and right by one full page.

                  Scroll 50 25

              means to scroll right half a page and down a quarter of a page.  The Scroll function should not be
              called from pop-up menus.  Normally, scrolling stops at the edge of the desktop.

              If  the  horizontal  and  vertical  percentages  are  100  or more and are multiplied by 1000 then
              scrolling wraps around at the edge of the desktop.  If

                  Scroll 100000 0

              is executed over and over fvwm moves to the next desktop page on each execution and  wraps  around
              at the edge of the desktop, so that every page is hit in turn.

              If  the  letter  'p'  is appended to each coordinate (horizontal and/or vertical), then the scroll
              amount is measured in pixels.

              Without arguments or if the option reverse  is  given  interactive  scrolling  takes  place.   The
              viewport  scrolls  as  the  mouse is moved.  With the reverse option scrolling is done in opposite
              direction of the mouse movement, and without it scrolling in the same direction as the mouse.

              The binding

                  Mouse 1 A CM Scroll reverse

              gives an effect of grabbing and dragging the viewport  with  button  1  if  Control  and  Meta  is
              pressed.

       Xinerama [bool]
              Enables Xinerama support if the boolean argument is true and disables it if the argument is false.
              Calling  this  command  without  arguments turns on Xinerama support if it was disabled before and
              turns it off if it was enabled.  For example:

                  # Turn Xinerama support on, use primary screen 2
                  XineramaPrimaryScreen 2
                  Xinerama on
                  # Turn it off again
                  Xinerama off

       XineramaPrimaryScreen [primary-screen]
              Takes an integer number or 'g' or 'c' as its argument.  A number is taken as  the  number  of  the
              Xinerama  screen  that is to be used as the primary screen.  The primary screen can be used as the
              preferred screen to place windows with

                  XineramaPrimaryScreen <screen number>
                  Style * StartsOnScreen p

              The primary screen is used in some of the modules and for the default icon box  too.   Any  number
              that  is  zero or more is taken as the primary screen's number.  Instead, the letter 'c' indicates
              to use the current screen (containing the pointer) whenever the primary screen is used.  This  may
              be  very  confusing  under some circumstances.  With 'g', the global screen is used as the primary
              screen, effectively disabling the primary screen.  Calling this function with any  other  argument
              (including none) resets the primary screen to 0.

       XineramaSls [bool]
              For  multi-screen  implementations  other  than  Xinerama,  such  as  Single Logical Screen, it is
              possible to simulate a Xinerama configuration if the total screen seen by fvwm is made up of equal
              sized monitors in a rectangular grid.  The XineramaSls command turns SLS  support  on  or  off  or
              toggles  it  to  the  opposite  state,  depending on if the boolean argument is "True", "False" or
              "toggle".  If no argument is given, this is treated like "toggle".  The default layout uses one by
              one screens.  To configure the layout, use the XineramaSlsSize or XineramaSlsScreens command.

       XineramaSlsSize Horizontal Vertical
              This command configures the layout of the Single Logical screen feature.  It takes two  arguments,
              Horizontal  and  Vertical  which  must  be an integer value dividing evenly into the total desktop
              width, and height.  For an example with two monitors side by  side  which  appear  as  one  screen
              through the X-Server with the right screen as the primary screen, use:

                  XineramaSlsSize 2x1
                  XineramaSls On
                  XineramaPrimaryScreen 1
                  Xinerama On

       XineramaSlsScreens number-of-screens [screen-spec ...]
              This  command  configures  the layout of the Single Logical screen feature.  Its first argument is
              the number of screens to use.   It  must  be  followed  by  exactly  this  number  of  screen-spec
              arguments.    Each   of   these   can   be   written   either   in  standard  X  geometry  format:
              "<width>x<height>+<x>+<y>" or as a space separated list of numbers: "x y width height".  Both ways
              of describing screens can be mixed in a single command.  All four numbers must be supplied.  The x
              and y values specify the origin of the screen in relation to  the  global  screen's  origin  while
              width  and  height specify the size of the screen in pixels.  No checks are done if the geometries
              make sense, so it is possible to define overlapping screens (with random results) or screens  that
              are not visible at all.

                  XineramaSlsScreens 3 \
                    512x768+0+0 512x300+512+0 512 300 512 468
                  XineramaSls On
                  XineramaPrimaryScreen 1
                  Xinerama On

   User Functions and Shell Commands
       AddToFunc [name [I | J | M | C | H | D action]]
              Begins or adds to a function definition.  Here is an example:

                  AddToFunc Move-or-Raise I Raise
                   + M Move
                   + D Lower

              The  function  name  is "Move-or-Raise", and it could be invoked from a menu or a mouse binding or
              key binding:

                  Mouse 1 TS A Move-or-Raise

              The name must not contain embedded whitespace.  No guarantees are made whether function names with
              embedded whitespace work or not.  This behavior may also change  in  the  future  without  further
              notice.  The letter before the action tells what kind of action triggers the command which follows
              it.   'I'  stands  for  "Immediate",  and  is executed as soon as the function is invoked.  'J' is
              similar to "Immediate" but is delayed until a button is pressed or  released  or  the  pointer  is
              moved,  or  the function completes.  It is always executed before the other function actions.  'M'
              stands for "Motion", i.e. if the user starts moving the mouse.  'C' stands for "Click",  i.e.,  if
              the user presses and releases the mouse button.  'H' stands for "Hold", i.e. if the user presses a
              mouse   button  and  holds  it  down  for  more  than  ClickTime  milliseconds.   'D'  stands  for
              "Double-click".  The action 'I' causes an action to be  performed  on  the  button-press,  if  the
              function is invoked with prior knowledge of which window to act on.

              There  is a number of predefined symbols that are replaced by certain values if they appear on the
              command line.  Please refer to the Command Expansion section for details.

              Warning Please read the comments on executing complex  functions  in  the  section  Scripting  and
              Complex Functions.

              Examples:

              If you call

                  Key F10 R A Function MailFunction xmh "-font fixed"

              and "MailFunction" is

                  AddToFunc MailFunction
                   + I Next ($0) Iconify off
                   + I Next (AcceptsFocus, $0) Focus
                   + I None ($0) Exec exec $0 $1

              Then the last line of the function becomes

                   + I None (xmh) Exec exec xmh -font fixed

              The  expansion is performed as the function is executed, so you can use the same function with all
              sorts of different arguments.  You could use

                  Key F11 R A Function MailFunction zmail "-bg pink"

              in the same config, if you wanted.  An example of using "$[w.id]" is:

                  AddToFunc PrintFunction
                   + I Raise
                   + I Exec xdpr -id $[w.id]

              Note that "$$" is expanded to '$'.

              Another example: bind right mouse button within the window button number 6  (this  is  a  minimize
              button for the win95 theme) to iconify all windows of the same resource:

                  AddToFunc FuncIconifySameResource "I" All ($0) Iconify on
                  Mouse 3 6 A FuncIconifySameResource $[w.resource]

       Beep
              As might be expected, this makes the terminal beep.

       DestroyFunc function
              Deletes  a function, so that subsequent references to it are no longer valid.  You can use this to
              change the contents of a function during a fvwm  session.   The  function  can  be  rebuilt  using
              AddToFunc.

                  DestroyFunc PrintFunction

       Echo string
              Prints a message to stderr.  Potentially useful for debugging things in your config.

                  Echo Beginning style definitions...

       EchoFuncDefinition function
              The  EchoFuncDefinition  is  similar  to  the Echo command but prints the definition for the given
              function to stderr.  It is useful to find out how fvwm handles quoting and for debugging functions

       Exec command
              Executes command.  You should not use an ampersand '&' at the end of the  command.   You  probably
              want  to  use an additional "exec" at the beginning of command.  Without that, the shell that fvwm
              invokes to run your command stays until the command exits.  In effect, you'll have twice  as  many
              processes running as you need.  Note that some shells are smart enough to avoid this, but it never
              hurts to include the "exec" anyway.

              The  following  example  binds  function key F1 in the root window, with no modifiers, to the exec
              function.  The program rxvt is started with an assortment of options.

                  Key F1 R N Exec exec rxvt -fg yellow -bg blue \
                    -e /bin/tcsh

              Note that this function doesn't wait for command to complete, so things like:

                  Exec "echo AddToMenu ... > /tmp/file"
                  Read /tmp/file

              do not work reliably (see the PipeRead command).

       ExecUseShell [shell]
              Makes the Exec command use the specified shell, or the value of the $SHELL environment variable if
              no shell is specified, instead of the default Bourne shell (/bin/sh).

                  ExecUseShell
                  ExecUseShell /usr/local/bin/tcsh

       Function FunctionName
              Used to bind a previously defined function to a key or mouse button.  The following example  binds
              mouse  button  1 to a function called "Move-or-Raise", whose definition was provided as an example
              earlier in this man page.   After  performing  this  binding  fvwm  executes  the  "move-or-raise"
              function whenever button 1 is pressed in a window's title-bar.

                  Mouse 1 T A Function Move-or-Raise

              The keyword Function may be omitted if FunctionName does not coincide with an fvwm command.

              Warning:  Please  read  the  comments  on executing complex functions in the section Scripting and
              Complex Functions.

       InfoStoreAdd key value
              Stores the value at the given key.  This is useful  to  store  generic  information  used  in  the
              lifetime of an fvwm config file.  For example storing program preferences for opening video files.

              The  purpose  of  this  command is to store internal information to fvwm which can be used bu fvwm
              functions, or when opening programs of a certain type.  Previous to this command the only  way  to
              do  this  was  via  SetEnv  but  this  is  discouraged  because  it places such information in the
              environment, which pollutes it and makes the information global to other processes started by fvwm
              which may then modify them which might not be what's wanted.  Hence the point of  InfoStoreAdd  is
              to still allow for such information to be stored, but kept internal to fvwm.

              In  this  way, one can build up as many key/value pairs as needed.  Recalling the value of a given
              key happens through fvwm's usual expansion mechanism.  See the Command Expansion section for  more
              details.  For example:

                      InfoStoreAdd teddybearprog xteddy

                      # Echo the value of teddybearprog
                      Echo $[infostore.teddybearprog]

              Removing an entry from the InfoStore is done with the InfoStoreRemove command.

       InfoStoreRemove key
              Removes an entry at the given key from the InfoStore.  Example:

                  InfoStoreRemove teddybearprog

       Nop
              Does  nothing.   This  is  used  to  insert a blank line or separator in a menu.  If the menu item
              specification is

                  AddToMenu MyMenu " " Nop

              then a blank line is inserted.  If it looks like

                  + "" Nop

              then a separator line is inserted.  Can also be used as the double-click action for Menu or Popup.

       PipeRead command [quiet]
              Causes fvwm to read commands from the output of the command.  This command is executed by  /bin/sh
              as  if you typed it on the command line.  If the command consists of more than one word it must be
              quoted.  Useful for building up dynamic menu entries based on a directories contents, for example.
              If the keyword Quiet follows the command no message is produced if the command is not found.

              Example:

                  AddToMenu HomeDirMenu
                  PipeRead 'for i in $HOME/*; \
                    do echo "+ $i Exec xterm -e vi $i"; done'

              Note: The PipeRead changes the pointer to a watch cursor by default  during  execution.   However,
              some  commands,  for  example xwd, need to take control of the pointer themselves and do not work.
              To disable the watch cursor, use the command prior to PipeRead

                  BusyCursor Read off

              The PipeRead command executes synchronously.  If you want to Exec something, but need the  command
              to run synchronously, you might do something like:

                  PipeRead 'command 1>&2'

              The  redirection  causes  any  output  from the program to go to stderr instead of being read as a
              sequence of commands by fvwm.  PipeRead returns 1 if the given command could be executed or -1  if
              not (see the section Conditional Commands for the meaning of return codes).

       Read filename [quiet]
              Causes  fvwm  to  read  commands  from  the file named filename.  If the keyword Quiet follows the
              command no message is produced if the file is not found.  If the file name does not begin  with  a
              slash  ('/'), fvwm looks in the user's data directory, then the system data directory.  The user's
              data directory is by default $HOME/.fvwm.  It can be overridden by exporting FVWM_USERDIR  set  to
              any other directory.  The Read command returns 1 if the given file could be read or -1 if not (see
              the section Conditional Commands for the meaning of return codes).

       SetEnv variable value
              Set  an environment variable to a new value, similar to the shell's export or setenv command.  The
              variable and its value are  inherited  by  processes  started  directly  by  fvwm.   This  can  be
              especially useful in conjunction with the FvwmM4 module.  For example:

                  SetEnv height HEIGHT

              makes  the  FvwmM4  set  variable  HEIGHT  usable  by processes started by fvwm as the environment
              variable $height.  If value includes whitespace, you should enclose it in quotes.  If no value  is
              given, the variable is deleted.

       Silent command
              A  number  of  commands  require  a  window  to operate on.  If no window was selected when such a
              function is invoked the user is asked to select a window.  Sometimes this  behavior  is  unwanted,
              for  example if the function was called by a module and the window that was selected at first does
              not exist anymore.  You can prevent this by putting Silent in front of the  fvwm  command.   If  a
              function  that  needs  a window is called with Silent without a window selected, it simply returns
              without doing anything.  If Silent is used on a user defined function it affects all function  and
              sub function calls until the original function exits.

              Another  usage  of  Silent is with binding commands Key, PointerKey and Mouse, this disables error
              messages.

              Silent also disables the error message for non-existent commands.  Note: This command  is  treated
              as a prefix to its command.  Expansion of the command line is done as if Silent was not there.

              Examples:

                  Silent Move 0 0
                  Silent User_defined_function
                  # do not complain on keyboards without "Help" key
                  Silent Key Help R A Popup HelpMenu

       UnsetEnv [variable]
              Unset  an  environment variable, similar to shell's export or unsetenv command.  The variable then
              is removed from the environment array inherited by processes started directly by fvwm.

       Wait window
              This command is intended to be used in fvwm functions only.  It causes execution of a function  to
              pause until a new window matching window appears.  This can be a window's name, class, or resource
              string.   It  may  contain the wildcards '*' and '?', which are matched in the usual Unix filename
              manner.  This is particularly useful in the "InitFunction" if you are trying to start  windows  on
              specific desktops:

                  AddToFunc InitFunction
                   + I Exec exec xterm -geometry 80x64+0+0
                   + I Wait xterm
                   + I GotoDesk 0 2
                   + I Exec exec xmh -font fixed -geometry \
                         507x750+0+0
                   + I Wait xmh
                   + I GotoDesk 0 0

              The  above function starts an xterm on the current desk, waits for it to map itself, then switches
              to desk 2 and starts an xmh.  After the xmh window appears control moves to desk 0.

              Fvwm remains partially functional during a wait, but any input from the modules is queued  up  and
              processed  only  after the window appears or the command is aborted.  For example, windows can not
              be focused with FvwmIconMan or FvwmPager during a wait.

              You can escape from a Wait pause by pressing Ctrl-Alt-Escape (where Alt is  the  first  modifier).
              To redefine this key sequence see the EscapeFunc command.

   Conditional Commands
       Conditional commands are commands that are only executed if certain conditions are met.  Most conditional
       commands  work  on  windows,  like Next, ThisWindow or All.  There is one conditional command, Test, that
       works on global conditions unrelated to windows.  The syntax of the conditions is described  below.   For
       readability, the list of conditions is located at the end of this section.

       Return Codes
              All  commands in this section (unless specifically stated for the command) also have a return code
              that can be 1 (if the condition was met) or 0 (if the condition was not met).  Some  commands  may
              return  -1  which  means that an error occurred and the return code is useless.  The Break command
              returns -2.  Additionally, the return codes of commands run in a complex functions are  passed  to
              the  invoking  complex  function.  The return code is used by the TestRc command.  Please refer to
              the commands' description for examples.  The return code can also be accessed through the variable
              $[cond.rc].  Non conditional commands do not modify  the  return  code  of  the  last  conditional
              command.   Important  note:  return  codes  are  only  defined  inside  functions created with the
              AddToFunc command and are not inherited by sub functions.  To run a command without  altering  the
              return code, the KeepRc command can be used.

       The Ring of Windows
              Fvwm  stores windows in a ring internally.  Think of the focused window as a cursor on the current
              position in the ring.  The Next command and many other commands search forwards through  the  ring
              for a matching window, and Prev searches backwards.  The windows in the ring are either ordered by
              creation  time  (if  the !FPSortWindowlistByFocus, NeverFocus or MouseFocus styles are used) or by
              the last time they had the focus.

       List of Conditional Commands
              All [options] [(conditions)] command
                     Execute command on all windows meeting the conditions.  It returns 1 if any window  matches
                     the  condition  and  0  otherwise.   The execution starts at the top of the window ring and
                     continues towards the bottom.  The options can be any combination of Reverse and  UseStack.
                     If  the option Reverse is given the execution order is reversed.  The option UseStack makes
                     All use the stacking order instead of the window ring when walking  through  windows.   See
                     the Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This  command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              Any [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command if any window which satisfies all conditions exists.  The command  is  run
                     in the context of the root window.  See the Conditions section for a list of conditions.

              Break [levels]
                     If  the  break command is used in a function, function execution is terminated immediately.
                     Further commands of the function are not processed.  Normally, all  nested  invocations  of
                     complex functions are left.  An optional integer number levels may be given to break out of
                     the  given  number  of  nested functions and continue execution of a higher level function.
                     The Break command always has the return code -2.  Example:

                         AddToFunc PickWindowRaiseAndDeiconify
                         + I Pick
                         + I TestRc (Error) Break
                         + I Raise
                         + I Iconify off

              Current [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command on the currently focused window if it satisfies all conditions.   See  the
                     Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This  command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              Direction [FromPointer] direction [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on a window in the given direction which  satisfies  all
                     conditions.   Normally, the center of the currently focused window or the context window in
                     which the command was invoked is taken as the starting point.  Lacking such  a  window,  or
                     when  the  FromPointer option is given, the current position of the pointer is taken as the
                     starting point.  The direction may be one of  "North",  "Northeast",  "East",  "Southeast",
                     "South",  "Southwest",  "West",  "Northwest"  and "Center".  Which window Direction selects
                     depends on angle and distance between the center points of the windows.  Closer windows are
                     considered a better match than those farther away.  The Center direction simply selects the
                     window closest to the starting point.  Returns -1 if an invalid direction was  given.   See
                     the Conditions section for a list of conditions.

              KeepRc command
                     Runs  the command but does not alter the return code of the previous command.  Note: KeepRc
                     is treated as a prefix to its command.  Expansion of the command line is done as if  KeepRc
                     was not there.

              Next [(conditions)] command
                     Performs  command  (typically Focus) on the next window which satisfies all conditions.  If
                     the command is running in a window context, it starts looking for a  matching  window  from
                     there.   Otherwise  it  starts at the focused window.  See Conditions section for a list of
                     conditions.

              None [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command if no window which satisfies all conditions exists.  The command is run in
                     the context of the root window.  Returns 1 if  no  window  matches  the  conditions  and  0
                     otherwise.  See Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This  command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              NoWindow command
                     Performs command, but removes the window context if any.  This is not really a  conditional
                     command, but a prefix that may be useful in menu items that should operate without a window
                     even if such menu is bound to window decorations.

              Pick [(conditions)] command
                     Pick  works  like  Function  if invoked in the context of a window.  If invoked in the root
                     window, it first asks the user to pick a window  and  then  executes  the  command  in  the
                     context  of  that window.  This avoids annoying multiple selections with complex functions.
                     The command is executed only if the given conditions are met.  Returns -1 if no window  was
                     selected.  See Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This  command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              PointerWindow [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command if the window under the pointer satisfies all conditions.  Returns  -1  if
                     there is no window under the pointer.  See Conditions section for a list of conditions.

                     This  command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

              Prev [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on the previous window which satisfies  all  conditions.
                     If the command is running in a window context, it starts looking for a matching window from
                     there.   Otherwise  it  starts at the focused window.  See Conditions section for a list of
                     conditions.

              ScanForWindow [FromPointer] dir1 dir2 [(conditions)] command
                     Performs command (typically Focus) on a window in the given direction which  satisfies  all
                     conditions.   Normally, the center of the currently focused window or the context window in
                     which the command was invoked is taken as the starting point.  Lacking such  a  window,  or
                     when  the  FromPointer option is given, the current position of the pointer is taken as the
                     starting  point.   The  direction  dir1  may  be  one  of  "North",  "NorthEast",   "East",
                     "SouthEast",  "South",  "SouthWest",  "West",  and "NorthWest".  Which window ScanForWindow
                     selects depends first on the position along the primary axis given by dir1.  If any windows
                     have the exact same coordinate along the primary axis, the secondary direction is  used  to
                     order  the  windows.   The direction dir2 may be one of the same set of values as dir1.  If
                     dir2 is not perfectly perpendicular to dir1, ScanForWindow returns a failure.   When  using
                     ScanForWindow  repeatedly  with  the  same  arguments,  it  is  guaranteed that all windows
                     matching the conditions will eventually be found.  If the focus reaches a limit  along  the
                     primary axis, it will wrap around to the opposite side.  Returns -1 if an invalid direction
                     was given.  See Conditions section for a list of conditions.

              Test [(test-conditions)] command
                     Performs  command  if  all test-conditions are satisfied.  The test-conditions are keywords
                     with possible arguments from the list below and are  separated  by  commas  or  whitespace.
                     They   include:  Version  operator  x.y.z,  EnvIsSet  varname,  EnvMatch  varname  pattern,
                     EdgeHasPointer  direction,  EdgeIsActive  direction,  Start,  Init,  Restart,  Exit,  Quit,
                     ToRestart, True, False, F, R, W, X and I.  A test-condition prefixed with "!" is negated.

                     The  Version  operator  x.y.z  test-condition  is fulfilled if the logical condition of the
                     expression is true.  Valid operator values are: >=, >, <=, <, == and !=.

                     Example:

                         Test (Version >= 2.5.11) Echo 2.5.11 or later.

                     The EnvIsSet varname test-condition is true if the given environment variable is set.   The
                     EnvMatch varname pattern test-condition is true if pattern matches the given environment or
                     infostore variable value.  (See InfoStoreAdd).  The pattern may contain special "*" and "?"
                     chars.  The "varname" is coded without the leading dollar sign ($).

                     The  EdgeHasPointer  [direction]  test-condition is true if the edge in the given direction
                     currently contains the pointer.  The EdgeIsActive [direction] test-condition is true if the
                     edge in the given direction currently is active.  An edge is  active,  and  can  contain  a
                     pointer  if  either a command is bound to it or edge scroll is available in that direction.
                     The direction may be one of
                      Any, North, Top, Up, West, Left, South, Bottom,
                      Down, Right and  East.  If no direction is specified Any is assumed.

                     The Start test-condition is the same as either Init or Restart.  It is only true on startup
                     or restart prior and during StartFunction execution.  The Exit test-condition is  the  same
                     as  either  Quit  or  ToRestart.  It is only valid on shutdown during ExitFunction function
                     execution.

                     The True and False test-conditions are unconditionally true and false.

                     Additionally, if a test-condition name is not recognized, the Error return code is set  and
                     the command is not executed.

                     The  F  file,  R  file, W file, X file and I file test-conditions test for existence of the
                     given [F]ile (possibly with [R]ead/[W]rite permissions), e[X]ecutable (in  $PATH),  or  the
                     [I]mage (in ImagePath).

                     Example:

                         AddToFunc StartFunction I Test (Init) Exec exec xterm

                         AddToFunc VerifyVersion
                         + I Test (Version 2.5.*) Echo 2.5.x detected
                         + I TestRc (NoMatch) \
                              Test (!Version 2.6.*) Echo Future version
                         + I TestRc (NoMatch) \
                              Echo 2.6.x is detected

                         Test (F $[FVWM_USERDIR]/local-config) Read local-config
                         Test (X xterm-utf16) Exec exec xterm-utf16

              TestRc [([!]returncode)] command
                     Performs command if the last conditional command returned the value returncode.  Instead of
                     the  numeric  values 0 (no match), 1 (match), -1 (error), and -2 (break) the symbolic names
                     "NoMatch", "Match", "Error" and "Break" can be  used.   If  no  returncode  is  given,  the
                     default  0 is assumed.  If the return code is prefixed with '!', the command is executed if
                     returncode does not match the value  returned  by  the  conditional  command.   The  TestRc
                     command  can only be used inside functions.  If the command is another conditional command,
                     the previous return code is replaced by the new one.  Example:

                         AddToFunc ToggleXterm
                         + I All (my_xtermwindow) Close
                         + I TestRc (NoMatch) Exec xterm -T my_xtermwindow

              ThisWindow [(conditions)] command
                     ThisWindow executes the specified command in the context of the current operand window.  If
                     there is no operand window (it is invoked in the root  window),  the  command  is  ignored.
                     ThisWindow  is never interactive.  The command is executed only if the given conditions are
                     met.  It returns -1 if used outside a window context.  See Conditions section for a list of
                     conditions.

                     This command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and  CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying "!CirculateHit" etc.  explicitly.

              WindowId [id] [(conditions)] | [root [screen]] command
                     The  WindowId  command looks for a specific window id and runs the specified command on it.
                     The second form of syntax retrieves the window id of the root window of the  given  screen.
                     If  no  screen  is  given,  the  current screen is assumed.  The window indicated by id may
                     belong to a window not managed by fvwm or even a window on a  different  screen.   Although
                     most  commands  can not operate on such windows, there are some exceptions, for example the
                     WarpToWindow command.  Returns -1 if no window with the given id  exists.   See  Conditions
                     section for a list of conditions.

                     This  command implies the conditions CirculateHit, CirculateHitIcon and CirculateHitShaded.
                     They can be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.

                     Examples:

                         WindowId 0x34567890 Raise
                         WindowId root 1 WarpToWindow 50 50
                         WindowId $0 (Silly_Popup) Delete

                     In the past this command was mostly useful for functions used with the WindowList  command,
                     or  for  selective  processing  of  FvwmEvent calls (as in the last example), but currently
                     these handler functions are called within a window context, so this command is  not  really
                     needed  in  these  cases.   Still it may be useful if, for example, the window id should be
                     stored in the environment variable for a further proceeding.

                         Pick SetEnv BOOKMARKED_WINDOW $[w.id]
                         WindowId $[BOOKMARKED_WINDOW] WarpToWindow

       Conditions
              The conditions that may be given as an argument to any conditional command are a list of  keywords
              separated  by  commas,  enclosed  in  parentheses.   Unless stated otherwise, conditional commands
              accept all the conditions  listed  below.   Note  that  earlier  versions  of  fvwm  required  the
              conditions  to  be  separated  by whitespace instead of commas and enclosed in brackets instead of
              parentheses (this is still supported for backward compatibility).

              In addition, the conditions may include one or more window names to match to.  If  more  than  one
              window name is given, all of them must match.  The window name, icon name, class, and resource are
              considered  when attempting to find a match.  Each name may include the wildcards '*' and '?', and
              may consist of two or more alternatives, separated by the character  '|',  which  acts  as  an  OR
              operator.   (If  OR operators are used, they must not be separated by spaces from the names.) Each
              window name can begin with '!', which prevents command if any of the window name, icon name, class
              or resource match.  However, '!' must not be applied to individual names in a group  separated  by
              OR  operators;  it  may only be applied to the beginning of the group, and then it operates on the
              whole group.

              Examples:

                  Next ("Netscape|konqueror|Mozilla*") WarpToWindow 99 90

              This goes to the next web browser window, no matter which of the three named web browsers is being
              used.

                  Next ("Mozilla*", "Bookmark*") WarpToWindow 99 90

              This goes to Mozilla's bookmark manager window, ignoring other Mozilla windows and other browsers'
              bookmark windows.

                  All ("XTerm|rxvt", !console) Iconify

              This iconifies all the xterm and rxvt windows on the current  page,  except  that  the  one  named
              "console" (with the -name option to xterm) is excluded.

                  Next (!"FvwmPager|FvwmForm*|FvwmButtons") Raise
                  Next (!FvwmPager, !FvwmForm*, !FvwmButtons) Raise

              These two commands are equivalent; either one raises the next window which is not one of the named
              fvwm modules.

              Any condition can be negated by using a an exclamation mark ('!')  directly in front of its name.

              AcceptsFocus,    AnyScreen,    CirculateHit,   CirculateHitIcon,   CirculateHitShaded,   Closable,
              CurrentDesk,   CurrentGlobalPage,   CurrentGlobalPageAnyDesk,   CurrentPage,   CurrentPageAnyDesk,
              CurrentScreen,   Desk,   FixedPosition,   FixedSize,   Focused,  HasHandles,  HasPointer,  Iconic,
              Iconifiable, Layer [n], Maximizable, Maximized,  Overlapped,  PlacedByButton  n,  PlacedByButton3,
              PlacedByFvwm,  Raised,  Shaded, State n, Sticky, StickyAcrossDesks, StickyAcrossPages, StickyIcon,
              StickyAcrossDesksIcon, StickyAcrossPagesIcon, Transient, Visible.

              The AcceptsFocus condition excludes all windows that do not want the input focus (the  application
              has set the "Input hints" for the window to False) and do not use the Lenience option of the Style
              command.  Also, all windows using the NeverFocus style are ignored.  Note: !Lenience is equivalent
              to the deprecated option NoLenience.

              With the AnyScreen condition used together with any of the Current...  conditions, windows that do
              not  intersect  the  Xinerama  screen containing the mouse pointer are considered for a match too.
              For example:

                  # Focus next window on current page,
                  # regardless of Xinerama screen
                  Next (CurrentPage, AnyScreen) Focus

              The CirculateHit and CirculateHitIcon options override  the  CirculateSkip  and  CirculateSkipIcon
              Style  attributes  for  normal  or  iconic  windows.   The CirculateHitShaded option overrides the
              CirculateSkipShaded Style.  All three options are turned on by default for  the  Current  command.
              They  can  be turned off by specifying !CirculateHit etc.  explicitly.  Note: Do not confuse these
              conditions with the style options of the same name.  Specifically,

                  Style foo CirculateSkip
                  Next (foo, CirculateHit) ...

              is not the same as

                  Style foo CirculateHit ...
                  Next (foo)

              The prior selects windows with the name foo only in the Next  command.   In  the  second  example,
              these windows are always matched in all conditional commands.

              The Closable condition matches only windows that are allowed to be closed.

              The CurrentDesk condition matches only windows that are on the current desk.

              The  CurrentGlobalPage  condition matches only windows that are on the current page of the current
              desk, regardless of whether Xinerama  support  is  enabled  or  not.   This  condition  implicitly
              activates the CurrentDesk condition.

              The  CurrentGlobalPageAnyDesk  condition  matches only windows that are on the current page of any
              desk, regardless of whether Xinerama support is enabled or not.

              The CurrentPage condition matches only windows that are on the current page of the  current  desk.
              If  Xinerama  support  is  enabled,  it  only  matches  windows that are at least partially on the
              Xinerama screen containing the mouse pointer.  This condition implicitly activates the CurrentDesk
              condition.

              The CurrentPageAnyDesk and CurrentScreen conditions matches only windows that are on  the  current
              page  of  any  desk.   If  Xinerama  support is enabled, they only match windows that are at least
              partially on the Xinerama screen containing the mouse pointer.

              The Screen [n] condition matches only windows which are on the specified Xinerama screen.

              The Desk [n] condition matches only windows which are on the specified desk.

              The FixedPosition condition excludes all windows that do not have a  fixed  position,  either  set
              through WM hints or the Style option FixedPosition.  Example:

                  DestroyFunc ToggleFixedGeometry
                  AddToFunc   ToggleFixedGeometry
                  + I Pick (FixedPosition) \
                       WindowStyle VariablePosition, VariableSize
                  + I TestRc (NoMatch) WindowStyle FixedPosition, FixedSize

              The  FixedSize condition excludes all windows that do not have a fixed size, either set through WM
              hints or the Style option FixedSize.

              The Focused matches on the window that currently has the keyboard focus.  This is not  useful  for
              the Current command but can be used with the other conditional commands.

              The HasHandles condition excludes all windows that do not have resize handles.

              The HasPointer condition excludes all windows that do not contain the pointer.

              The Iconic condition matches only iconic windows.

              The Iconifiable condition matches only windows that are allowed to be iconified.

              The Layer [n] condition matches only windows on the specified layer.  The optional argument of the
              Layer condition defaults to the layer of the focused window.  The negation !Layer switches off the
              Layer condition.

              The Maximizable condition matches only windows that are allowed to be maximized.

              The Maximized condition matches only maximized windows.

              The Fullscreen condition matches only fullscreen windows.

              The  Overlapped  condition  matches  only windows that are overlapped by other windows on the same
              layer (or unmanaged windows if the option RaiseOverUnmanaged of  the  BugOpts  command  is  used).
              Note that this condition can be slow if you have many windows or if RaiseOverUnmanaged is used and
              the connection to the X server is slow.

              The PlacedByButton n condition is fulfilled if the last interactive motion of the window (with the
              Move command or as ManualPlacement) was ended by pressing mouse button n.  Example:

                  Mouse   1 T     A       Function MoveWindow

                  DestroyFunc MoveWindow
                  AddToFunc MoveWindow
                  + C Move
                  + C ThisWindow (PlacedByButton 5) WindowShade off
                  + C TestRc (Match) Maximize on 0 100
                  + C ThisWindow (PlacedByButton 4) WindowShade on

              The  PlacedByButton3  condition  has  the  same  meaning as PlacedByButton 3.  It remains only for
              backward compatibility.

              The PlacedByFvwm condition excludes all windows that have been placed manually  or  by  using  the
              user or program position hint.

              The  Raised conditions matches only windows that are fully visible on the current viewport and not
              overlapped by any other window.

              The Shaded conditions matches only shaded windows (see WindowShade command).

              The State n or !State n conditions match only windows with the specified  integer  state  set  (or
              unset).  See the State command for details.  The argument may range from 0 to 31.

              The  Sticky, StickyAcrossDesks and StickyAcrossPages match only windows that are currently sticky,
              sticky across all desks or sticky across all pages.  Please refer to the Style  options  with  the
              same name and the commands Stick, StickAcrossDesks and StickAcrossPages for details.

              The  StickyIcon,  StickyAcrossDesksIcon  and  StickyAcrossPagesIcon match only windows that become
              sticky, sticky across all desks or sticky across all pages when they are in iconified state.

              The Transient condition matches only windows  that  have  the  "transient"  property  set  by  the
              application.   This  it  usually  the case for application popup menus and dialogs.  The FvwmIdent
              module can be used to find out whether a specific window is transient.

              The Visible condition matches only windows that are at least  partially  visible  on  the  current
              viewport and not completely overlapped by other windows.

   Module Commands
       Fvwm maintains a database of module configuration lines in a form

           *<ModuleName>: <Config-Resource>

       where <ModuleName> is either a real module name or an alias.

       This  database  is  initially filled from config file (or from output of -cmd config command), and can be
       later modified either by user (via FvwmCommand) or by modules.

       When modules are run, they read appropriate portion of  database.   (The  concept  of  this  database  is
       similar to one used in X resource database).

       Commands for manipulating module configuration database are described below.

       * module_config_line
              Defines  a module configuration.  module_config_line consists of a module name (or a module alias)
              and a module resource line.  The new syntax allows a  delimiter,  a  colon  and  optional  spaces,
              between the module name and the rest of the line, this is recommended to avoid conflicts.

                  *FvwmPager: WindowBorderWidth 1
                  *FvwmButtons-TopRight: Geometry 100x100-0+0
                  *FvwmButtons-Bottom: Geometry +0-0

       DestroyModuleConfig module_config
              Deletes  module  configuration  entries,  so  that new configuration lines may be entered instead.
              This also sometimes the only way to turn back some  module  settings,  previously  defined.   This
              changes the way a module runs during a fvwm session without restarting.  Wildcards can be used for
              portions of the name as well.

              The  new non-conflicting syntax allows a delimiter, a colon and optional spaces between the module
              name and the rest of the line.  In this case a module name (or alias) can't have wildcards.

                  DestroyModuleConfig FvwmButtons*
                  DestroyModuleConfig FvwmForm: Fore
                  DestroyModuleConfig FvwmIconMan: Tips*

       KillModule modulename [modulealias]
              Causes the module which was invoked with name modulename to  be  killed.   The  name  may  include
              wildcards.  If modulealias is given, only modules started with the given alias are killed.

                  # kill all pagers
                  KillModule FvwmPager

                  Module FvwmEvent SoundEvent
                  KillModule FvwmEvent SoundEvent

       Module modulename [moduleparams]
              Specifies  a  module  with  its  optional  parameters  which should be spawned.  Currently several
              modules, including  FvwmButtons,  FvwmEvent,  FvwmForm,  FvwmPager,  FvwmScript  support  aliases.
              Aliases  are  useful  if  more  than one instance of the module should be spawned.  Aliases may be
              configured separately using * syntax.  To start a module  FvwmForm  using  an  alias  MyForm,  the
              following syntax may be used:

                  Module FvwmForm MyForm

              At the current time the available modules (included with fvwm) are FvwmAnimate (produces animation
              effects  when  a window is iconified or de-iconified), FvwmAuto (an auto raise module), FvwmBacker
              (to change the background when you change desktops), FvwmBanner (to display a spiffy XBM, XPM, PNG
              or SVG), FvwmButtons (brings up a customizable tool bar), FvwmCommandS (a command  server  to  use
              with  shell's  FvwmCommand  client),  FvwmConsole (to execute fvwm commands directly), FvwmCpp (to
              preprocess your config with cpp), FvwmEvent (trigger various  actions  by  events),  FvwmForm  (to
              bring  up  dialogs), FvwmIconMan (a flexible icon manager), FvwmIdent (to get window info), FvwmM4
              (to preprocess your config with m4), FvwmPager (a mini version of the desktop), FvwmPerl  (a  Perl
              manipulator  and  preprocessor),  FvwmProxy (to locate and control obscured windows by using small
              proxy  windows),  FvwmRearrange  (to  rearrange  windows),  FvwmScript  (another  powerful  dialog
              toolkit),  These  modules  have  their  own man pages.  There may be other modules out on there as
              well.

              Modules can be short lived transient programs or, like FvwmButtons , can remain for  the  duration
              of  the  X  session.  Modules are terminated by the window manager prior to restarts and quits, if
              possible.  See the introductory section  on  modules.   The  keyword  Module  may  be  omitted  if
              modulename is distinct from all fvwm commands.

       ModuleListenOnly modulename [moduleparams]
              This command works like the Module command, but fvwm never sends any messages to the module.  This
              may  be handy to write a module as a shell script that is triggered by external events without the
              burden to answer packets sent by fvwm.  For example, a module written as a shell script may change
              labels of the FvwmButtons module to implement a simple clock.

       ModulePath path
              Specifies a colon separated list of directories in which to search for modules.  To find a module,
              fvwm searches each directory in turn and uses the first file found.  Directory names on  the  list
              do not need trailing slashes.

              The  ModulePath  may  contain environment variables such as $HOME (or ${HOME}).  Further, a '+' in
              the path is expanded to the previous value of the path, allowing easy appending or  prepending  to
              the path.

              For example:

                  ModulePath ${HOME}/lib/fvwm/modules:+

              The  directory  containing  the  standard  modules  is  available  via  the  environment  variable
              $FVWM_MODULEDIR.

       ModuleSynchronous [Expect string] [Timeout secs] modulename
              The ModuleSynchronous command is very similar to Module.  Fvwm stops processing any  commands  and
              user input until the module sends a string beginning with "NOP FINISHED STARTUP" back to fvwm.  If
              the  optional  Timeout  is  given  fvwm gives up if the module sent no input back to fvwm for secs
              seconds.   If  the  Expect  option  is  given,  fvwm  waits  for   the   given   string   instead.
              ModuleSynchronous  should  only  be used during fvwm startup to enforce the order in which modules
              are started.  This command is intended for use  with  the  (currently  hypothetical)  module  that
              should be in place before other modules are started.

              Warning:  It  is  quite easy to hang fvwm with this command, even if a timeout is given.  Be extra
              careful choosing the string to wait for.  Although all modules in the fvwm distribution send  back
              the "NOP FINISHED STARTUP" string once they have properly started up, this may not be the case for
              third  party  modules.  Moreover, you can try to escape from a locked ModuleSynchronous command by
              using the key sequence Ctrl-Alt-Escape (see the EscapeFunc).

       ModuleTimeout timeout
              Specifies how many seconds fvwm waits for a module to respond.  If the  module  does  not  respond
              within  the  time  limit then fvwm kills it.  timeout must be greater than zero, or it is reset to
              the default value of 30 seconds.

       SendToModule modulename string
              Sends an arbitrary string (no quotes required) to  all  modules,  whose  alias  or  name  matching
              modulename,  which  may  contain  wildcards.   This  only  makes  sense if the module is set up to
              understand and deal with these strings though.  Can be used for module to module communication, or
              implementation of more complex commands in modules.

   Session Management Commands
       Quit
              Exits fvwm, generally causing X to exit too.

       QuitScreen
              Causes fvwm to stop managing the screen on which the command was issued.

       Restart [window_manager [params]]
              Causes fvwm to restart itself if window_manager is left blank, or to switch to an alternate window
              manager (or other fvwm version) if window_manager is specified.  If the window manager is  not  in
              your default search path, then you should use the full path name for window_manager.

              This  command should not have a trailing ampersand.  The command can have optional parameters with
              simple shell-like syntax.  You  can  use  ~  (is  expanded  to  the  user's  home  directory)  and
              environmental variables $VAR or ${VAR}.  Here are several examples:

                  Key F1 R N Restart
                  Key F1 R N Restart fvwm -s
                  Key F1 R N Restart ~/bin/fvwm -f $HOME/.fvwm/main
                  Key F1 R N Restart fvwm1 -s -f .fvwmrc
                  Key F1 R N Restart xterm -n '"X console"' \
                    -T \"X\ console\" -e fvwm1 -s

              If  you  need  a  native restart, we suggest only to use Restart command without parameters unless
              there is a reason not to.  If you still use an old command 'Restart fvwm2'  that  was  correct  in
              2.2.x,  all  current  command  line  arguments  are lost.  On a restart without parameters or with
              --pass-args, they are preserved.  Here are some cases when 'Restart fvwm2' or 'Restart fvwm' cause
              troubles:

                  * running fvwm under a session manager
                  * running fvwm with multi headed displays
                  * having command line arguments, like
                    -f themes-rc or -cmd
                  * if the first fvwm2 in the $PATH is a
                    different one

              This is why we are issuing a warning on an old usage.  If you really want to restart to fvwm  with
              no  additional  arguments,  you may get rid of this warning by using "Restart fvwm -s" or "Restart
              /full/path/fvwm".

              Note, currently  with  multi  headed  displays,  restart  of  fvwms  on  different  screens  works
              independently.

       Restart --pass-args window_manager
              The  same  as  Restart  without parameters but the name for the current window manager is replaced
              with the specified window_manager and original arguments are preserved.

              This command is useful if you use initial arguments like

                  -cmd FvwmCpp

              and want to switch to another fvwm version without losing the initial arguments.

       Restart --dont-preserve-state [other-params]
              The same as

                  Restart [other-params]

              but it does not save any window states over the restart.

              Without this option, Restart preserves most per-window  state  by  writing  it  to  a  file  named
              .fs-restart-$HOSTDISPLAY in the user's home directory.

       SaveSession
              Causes  a  session  manager  (if any) to save the session.  This command does not work for xsm, it
              seems that xsm does not implement this functionality.  Use Unix signals to manage xsm remotely.

       SaveQuitSession
              Causes a session manager (if any) to save and then shutdown the session.  This  command  does  not
              work for xsm, it seems that xsm does not implement this functionality.  Use Unix signals to manage
              xsm remotely.

   Colorsets
       Colorsets are a powerful method to control colors.  Colorsets create appearance resources that are shared
       by fvwm and its modules.  When a colorset is modified all parts of fvwm react to that change.  A colorset
       includes  a foreground color, background color, shadow and highlight color (often based on the background
       color), background face (this includes images and all kinds of gradients).  There  is  a  way  to  render
       background face and specify other color operations.

       In  the  2.4.x versions a special module FvwmTheme was introduced to manage colorsets.  Starting with the
       2.5.x beta version, the FvwmTheme functionality was moved  to  the  core  fvwm,  so  this  module  became
       obsolete.  In 2.6.7 the FvwmTheme module was removed.

       The old syntax:

           DestroyModuleConfig FvwmTheme: *
           *FvwmTheme: Colorset 0 fg black, bg rgb:b4/aa/94
           *FvwmTheme: Colorset 1 fg black, bg rgb:a1/b2/c8

       corresponds to the new syntax:

           CleanupColorsets
           Colorset 0 fg black, bg rgb:b4/aa/94
           Colorset 1 fg black, bg rgb:a1/b2/c8

       Colorset num [options]
              Creates  or modifies colorset num.  Colorsets are identified by this number.  The number can start
              at zero and can be a very large number.

              Warning: The highest colorset number used determines memory  consumption.   Thus,  if  you  define
              'Colorset  100000',  the memory for 100001 colorsets is used.  Keep your colorset numbers as small
              as possible.

              By convention, colorsets are numbered like this:

                  # 0 = Default colors
                  # 1 = Inactive windows
                  # 2 = Active windows
                  # 3 = Inactive menu entry and menu background
                  # 4 = Active menu entry
                  # 5 = greyed out menu entry (only bg used)
                  # 6 = module foreground and background
                  # 7 = hilight colors

              If you need to have more colors and do not want to reinvent the wheel, you may use the  convention
              used in fvwm-themes, it defines the meaning of the first 40 colorsets for nearly all purposes:

              http://fvwm-themes.sourceforge.net/doc/colorsets

              Each colorset has four colors, an optional pixmap and an optional shape mask.  The four colors are
              used  by  modules  as the foreground, background, highlight and shadow colors.  When a colorset is
              created it defaults to a  foreground  of  black  and  background  of  gray.   The  background  and
              foreground  are marked as "average" and "contrast" (see later) so that just specifying a pixmap or
              gradient gives sensible results.

              options is a comma separated list containing some of the keywords: fg, Fore, Foreground, bg, Back,
              Background, hi, Hilite, Hilight, sh,  Shade,  Shadow,  fgsh,  Pixmap,  TiledPixmap,  AspectPixmap,
              Transparent,  RootTransparent,  Shape,  TiledShape, AspectShape, NoShape, ?Gradient, Tint, fgTint,
              bgTint, Alpha, fgAlpha, Dither, NoDither, IconTint, IconAlpha, Plain.

              fg, Fore and Foreground take a color name as an  argument  and  set  the  foreground  color.   The
              special name Contrast may be used to select a color that contrasts well with the background color.
              To reset the foreground color to the default value you can simply omit the color name.

              bg,  Back  and  Background take a color name as an argument and set the background color.  It also
              sets the highlight and shadow colors to values that give  a  3d  effect  unless  these  have  been
              explicitly  set  with  the  options below.  The special name Average may be used to select a color
              that is the average color of the pixmap.  If the pixmap is tinted with the Tint option,  the  tint
              is not taken in account in the computation of the average color.  You should use the bgTint option
              to  get the "real" average color.  The background color is reset to the default value if the color
              name is omitted.

              hi, Hilite and Hilight take a color name as an argument and  set  the  highlight  color.   If  the
              highlight  color  is not explicitly set, the default is to calculate it from the background color.
              To switch back to the default behavior the color name can be omitted.

              sh, Shade and Shadow take a color name as an argument and set the shadow  color.   If  the  shadow
              color  is not explicitly set, the default is to calculate it from the background color.  To switch
              back to the default behavior the color name can be omitted.

              fgsh takes a color name as an argument and sets the color used by the shadowing font effect.   See
              the  Font Shadow Effects section of the fvwm man page.  By default this color is computed from the
              foreground and background colors.  To switch back to the default the color name can be omitted.

              Pixmap, TiledPixmap and AspectPixmap take a file name as an argument, search the ImagePath and use
              it as the background pixmap.  Any transparent parts are filled with  the  background  color.   Not
              specifying  a  file  name  removes  any  existing  image  from the colorset.  TiledPixmap produces
              repeated copies of the image with no scaling, Pixmap causes the  image  to  be  stretched  to  fit
              whatever object the colorset is applied to and AspectPixmap stretches to fit but retains the image
              aspect ratio.

              Transparent creates a transparent background pixmap.  The pixmap is used as a window background to
              achieve  root  transparency.   For  this you should use the ParentalRelativity option to the Style
              command.  A subsequent root background change may be detected or not, this depends on the  program
              used to set the background.  If you use fvwm-root, xsetbg (xli), FvwmBacker with solid or colorset
              colors  or  a  recent version of Esetroot (>= 9.2) a background change is detected.  If background
              changes are not detected (e.g., if you use xv or xsetroot) you can force detection by using the -d
              option of fvwm-root:

                  xv -root -quit mybg.png; fvwm-root -d

              Due to the way X implements transparency no guarantees can be made that the desired effect can  be
              achieved.   The  application  may even crash.  If you experience any problems with this option, do
              not use it.

              Using outline move and resize (see the OpaqueMoveSize command and the ResizeOpaque  Style  option)
              as  well  as  setting  the  WindowShadeShrinks  style  may  help.   The transparency achieved with
              Transparent depends on whether the colorset is applied to the foreground or the  background  of  a
              window.   In  the  second  case the transparency is relative to the parent window of the window on
              which the colorset is defined.  For example:

                  Colorset 12 VGradient 200 grey30 grey60
                  Colorset 17 Transparent
                  *FvwmIconMan: Colorset 12
                  *FvwmIconMan: PlainColorset 17

              gives an IconMan with a vertical grey gradient background and the buttons use the  background  (by
              transparency).  To obtain a (root) transparent IconMan:

                  Colorset 12 Transparent
                  Colorset 17 Transparent
                  Colorset 18 Transparent
                  Colorset 19 Transparent

                  *FvwmIconMan: Colorset 12
                  *FvwmIconMan: PlainColorset 17
                  *FvwmIconMan: FocusColorset 18
                  *FvwmIconMan: IconColorset  19

              The  Colorset  IconMan option defines the IconMan window background, but the PlainColorset and the
              FocusColorset are drawn on the foreground.   So,  the  transparency  of  the  IconMan  buttons  is
              achieved by drawing nothing.  Now if this IconMan is swallowed in an FvwmButtons as:

                  FvwmButtons:(Colorset 10, Swallow "FvwmIconMan" 'FvwmIconMan')

              then,  FvwmIconMan  becomes  a child of FvwmButtons and it is transparent relative to FvwmButtons.
              So, in this case FvwmIconMan uses Colorset 10 as background.  If you want  root  transparency  use
              the RootTransparent option.  FvwmButtons FvwmIconMan, and FvwmIdent, are relatively simple.  There
              is one main colorset option which defines the background of the window and the other colorsets (if
              any)  are  drawn  on the foreground.  The case of FvwmProxy is simpler, the two colorsets refer to
              the window backgrounds.  FvwmPager is more complicated as  almost  everything  in  the  pager  are
              windows  with  some  parental  relations  (the mini windows are the child and the desktops are the
              parents and all this is complicated by the hilighted  page).   So,  the  colorsets  apply  to  the
              background of these windows.  You should experiment.  For FvwmForm and FvwmScript the situation is
              similar.   There  is  a  main  window  (a  child of the root window) which corresponds to the main
              colorset and most of the widgets are windows which are children of the main window.  Tint may work
              or not with the Transparent option.  When the colorset is drawn  on  the  foreground  Tint  should
              work.   In  some  cases,  tinting  may  be  very  slow.   Tinting may work with fvwm menu (without
              animation).  Tinting may work better if your X server has backing store enabled (try  xdpyinfo  to
              see if this the case).  There is a chance that the backing store support of your X server does not
              work  well  with the terrible hack used to Tint the ParentRelative Pixmap.  So, to get tinted root
              transparency it is more safe to use the RootTransparent option.

              RootTransparent [ buffer ] creates a root transparent background.  To make this option  work,  you
              must  use  an Esetroot compatible program, fvwm-root with the --retain-pixmap option or FvwmBacker
              with the RetainPixmap option (and colorset or solid backgrounds).  The buffer  keyword  is  useful
              only  when the Tint option is used too.  This speeds up creation of windows which use the colorset
              (useful for fvwm menus) at the cost of memory usage.  It also speeds up  opaque  move  and  resize
              which  can  be  unacceptably slow without buffer.  However, this option may add a lot of memory to
              your X server (depending on the size of the image used to set the background).  In summary,  using
              outline move and resize for modules which use such a colorset may be a good idea.

              Shape, TiledShape and AspectShape take a file name as an argument, search the ImagePath and use it
              as  the  shape  bitmap.   TiledShape produces repeated copies of the bitmap with no scaling, Shape
              causes the bitmap to be  stretched  to  fit  whatever  object  the  colorset  is  applied  to  and
              AspectShape  stretches to fit but retains the bitmap aspect ratio.  If the file is a pixmap in xpm
              format the shape mask (all opaque pixels) of the pixmap is used.  For  png  and  svg  images,  the
              shape mask is equivalent to all not completely transparent pixels (alpha > 0).

              Warning  Due  to the way X11 implements shapes you cannot take back making windows shaped. You may
              have to restart fvwm or the shaped application.

              ?Gradient ...  creates a pixmap and stretches it to fit the  window.   ?Gradient  may  be  one  of
              HGradient,  VGradient,  DGradient,  BGradient,  SGradient, CGradient, RGradient or YGradient.  The
              gradient types are as follows: H is horizontal; V is vertical; D is  diagonal  from  top  left  to
              bottom  right; B is a backwards diagonal from bottom left to top right; S is concentric squares; C
              is concentric circles; R is a radar like pattern and Y is a Yin Yang style (but without the dots).
              Please refer to the Color Gradients section for the syntax of gradients.

              Tint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and 100.  It causes the  image  defined
              using  ?Pixmap  or  ?Gradient  to be tinted with the specified color using the percentage.  If the
              image is transparent Tint tints  only  the  image  part.   Unfortunately,  a  colorset  background
              specified  using  the Transparent option can give strange results.  See the Transparent option for
              details.  With no arguments this option removes the tint.

              fgTint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and 100.  It causes the color defined
              using fg to be tinted with the specified color using  the  percentage.   With  no  arguments  this
              option removes the tint.

              bgTint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and 100.  It causes the color defined
              using  bg to be tinted with the specified color using the percentage.  If the sh and hi colors are
              not specified, they are recomputed from the tinted  bg  color.   With  no  arguments  this  option
              removes the tint.

              Alpha  takes  a  percentage  between  0 and 100 as an argument.  It causes fvwm to merge the image
              defined using ?Pixmap or ?Gradient with the bg color using the percentage.  If the percentage is 0
              the image is hidden and if it is 100 the image is displayed as usual (no merge).  The  default  is
              100 and it is restored if no argument is given.

              fgAlpha takes a percentage between 0 and 100 as an argument.  It causes fvwm to merge the text and
              the colorset background using the percentage.  If the percentage is 0 the text is hidden and if it
              is  100  the  text  is  displayed  as usual (no merge).  This option has an effect only with fonts
              loaded by Xft, see the Font Names and Font Loading section.  The default is 100 and it is restored
              if no argument is given.

              Dither causes fvwm to dither the image defined using ?Pixmap or ?Gradient.  This  is  useful  only
              with  displays  with depth less than or equal to 16 (i.e., on displays which can only display less
              than 65537 colors at once).  The dithering effect lets you simulate having more  colors  available
              that  you actually have.  NoDither causes fvwm to do not dither the images.  Dither is the default
              if the depth is less than or equal to 8 (a screen with 256 colors or less).  In  depth  15  (32768
              colors)  and  16  (65536  colors), the default is NoDither, however this effect can be useful with
              images which contain a lot of close colors.  For example a fine gradient looks more smooth.

              IconTint takes 2 arguments, a color and a percentage between 0 and  100.   It  causes  fvwm  or  a
              module  to  tint  the  "icons"  which are rendered into the colorset background with the specified
              color using a percentage.  Here "icons" means,  fvwm  Icons,  fvwm  menu  icons,  MiniIcons  which
              represent applications in various modules, images loaded by modules (e.g., images specified by the
              Icon FvwmButtons button option) ...etc.  With no arguments this option removes the icon tint.

              IconAlpha  takes  a  percentage  between  0  and  100 as an argument.  It causes fvwm to merge the
              "icons" which are rendered into the colorset background using this percentage.  The default is 100
              and it is restored if no argument is given.

              Note: It is equivalent to use "Tint a_color rate" and "Alpha a" if a = 100 and  the  bg  color  is
              a_color.   This  equivalence  does not hold for IconAlpha and IconTint as the background can be an
              image or a gradient (and not a uniform color background).  However, in some cases you can  achieve
              (almost)  the  same effect by using IconTint in the place of IconAlpha.  This is preferable as, in
              general, IconAlpha generates more redrawing than IconTint.

              NoShape removes the shape mask from the colorset while Plain  removes  the  background  pixmap  or
              gradient.

              Examples

                  Colorset 3 fg tan, bg navy

              If necessary this creates colorsets 0, 1, 2 and 3 and then changes colorset 3 to have a foreground
              of tan, a background of navy.

                  Colorset 3 bg "navy blue"

              changes the background color of colorset 3 to navy blue.  The foreground and pixmap are unchanged.

                  Colorset 3 AspectPixmap large_murky_dungeon.xpm

              causes depression.

                  Colorset 3 bg Average

              Sets  the  background  color  and  the  relief colors to match the background pixmap.  This is the
              default setting but it must be used if a background color was specified and is now not required.

                  Colorset 3 YGradient 200 3 blue 1000 navy 1 blue 1000 navy

              Adds a Yin Yang gradient background pixmap to colorset 3.  If the background is set to average  it
              is recomputed along with the foreground if that is set to contrast.

                  #!/bin/sh
                  FvwmCommand "Colorset 7 fg navy, bg gray"
                  while true
                  do
                    FvwmCommand "Colorset 7 fg gray"
                    sleep 1
                    FvwmCommand "Colorset 7 fg navy"
                    sleep 1
                  done

              Makes colorset 7 blink.

              The color names used in colorsets are saved as fvwm variables which can be substituted in any fvwm
              command.  For example:

                  AddToFunc InitFunction
                  + I Exec exec xterm -fg $[fg.cs0] -bg $[bg.cs0]

              Where  $[fg.cs0]  is the foreground color of colorset zero.  Please refer to the Command Expansion
              section for more information.

       CleanupColorsets
              Resets a definition of all colorsets.

       Color Gradients
              A color gradient is a background that changes its color gradually from one hue to a different one.
              Color gradients can be used by various commands and modules of fvwm.  There  are  eight  types  of
              gradients:  HGradient  is a horizontal gradient, VGradient is vertical, DGradient is diagonal from
              top left to bottom right, BGradient is backwards diagonal from bottom left to top right, SGradient
              is concentric squares, CGradient is concentric circles, RGradient is  a  radar  like  pattern  and
              YGradient is a Yin Yang style (but without the dots).

              The color gradient syntax has two forms:

              ?Gradient colors start-color end-color

              This  form  specifies  a  linear  gradient.   The  arguments  denote the total number of colors to
              allocate (between 2 and 1000), the initial color and the final color.

              Example:

                  TitleStyle VGradient 20 rgb:b8/ce/bc rgb:5b/85/d0

              ?Gradient colors segments color length color [length color] ...

              The second form specifies a nonlinear gradient.  The arguments are: the total number of colors  to
              allocate  (between  2  and  1000),  then  the  number  of segments.  For each segment, specify the
              starting color, a relative length, then the ending color.  Each subsequent segment begins with the
              second color of the last segment.  The lengths may be any non-negative integers.   The  length  of
              one segment divided by the sum of all segments lengths is the fraction of the colors that are used
              for the segment.

              Examples:

                  MenuStyle * \
                       MenuFace DGradient 128 2 lightgrey 50 blue 50 white

                  # 20% gradient from red to blue,
                  # 30% from blue to black,
                  # 50% from black to grey
                  MenuStyle * \
                       MenuFace DGradient 100 3 Red 20 Blue 30 Black 50 Grey

                  # 50% from blue to green, then
                  # 50% from yellow to red
                  Colorset 0 HGradient 128 3 Blue 1000 Green 1 Yellow 1000 Red

ENVIRONMENT

       The environment variables that have an effect on how fvwm operates are the following:

       DISPLAY
           Fvwm starts on this display unless the -display option is given.

       FVWM_MODULEDIR
           Set by fvwm to the directory containing the standard fvwm modules.

       FVWM_USERDIR
           Used  to  determine  the  user's data directory for reading and sometimes writing personal files.  If
           this variable is not already set, it is set by fvwm to $HOME/.fvwm, which is the default user's  data
           directory.

       SESSION_MANAGER
           Fvwm tries to contact this session manager.

       SESSION_MANAGER_NAME
           This  is  used  mainly  to  determine xsm running to work around its bug.  If this variable is set to
           "xsm", DiscardCommand is set as xsm expects it and not as XSMP requires.  If you run fvwm under  xsm,
           you should set this variable to "xsm", otherwise old state files are not removed.

       SM_SAVE_DIR
           If  this  is set, fvwm saves its session data in this directory.  Otherwise it uses $HOME.  Note, the
           state files are named .fs-??????  and normally are removed automatically when not used anymore.

AUTHORS

       Robert Nation with help from many people, based on twm code, which was written by Tom  LaStrange.   After
       Robert  Nation  came  Charles Hines, followed by Brady Montz.  Currently fvwm is developed by a number of
       people on the fvwm-workers mailing list.

COPYRIGHT

       Fvwm and all the modules, scripts and other files coming with the distribution are  subject  to  the  GNU
       General Public License (GPL).  Please refer to the COPYING file that came with fvwm for details.

BUGS

       Bug reports can be sent to the fvwm-workers mailing list at <fvwm-workers@fvwm.org>

       The official fvwm homepage is http://fvwm.org/.

                                                   19-Oct-2022                                           FVWM(1)